GRL150 6F2S0828 2.0

6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
GRL150
© TOSHIBA Corporation 2005

All Rights Reserved.
( Ver. 2.0 )
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRL150. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used

Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or

serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or

serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
minor injury or moderate injury.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
 1 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
DANGER
 Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING
 Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated
is dangerous.
 Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
 Fiber optic
Invisible laser radiation
Do not view directly with optical instruments.
CAUTION
 Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
 Operating environment
The equipment must only used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust
detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
 Ratings
Before applying AC current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they conform to
the equipment ratings.
 Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
 DC power
If dc power has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records, event
records and disturbance records and internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring the power.
This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain data.
 2 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 Disposal
When disposing of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations.
环保使用期限标识是根据《电子信息产品污染控制管理办法》以及《电子信息产品污染控制标识要求》
(SJ/T11364-2006)、《电子信息产品环保使用期限通则》制定的，适用于中国境内销售的电子信息产品的标识。
只要按照安全及使用说明内容在正常使用电子信息产品情况下，从生产日期算起，在此期限内产品中含有的有毒
有害物质不致发生外泄或突变，不致对环境造成严重污染或对其人身、财产造成严重损害。
产品正常使用后，要废弃在环保使用年限内或者刚到年限的产品，请根据国家标准采取适当的方法进行处置。
另外，此期限不同于质量/功能的保证期限。
The Mark and Information are applicable for People's Republic of China only.
 3 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Contents
Safety Precautions 1
1. Introduction 8
2. Application Notes 10
2.1 Protection schemes 10
2.2 Current Differential Protection 10
2.2.1 Operation of Current Differential Protection 11
2.2.2 Characteristic of Current Differential Element DIF 12
2.2.3 Fail-safe Function (Overcurrent Guard Scheme) 13
2.2.4 Open Terminal (Out-of-Service) Detection 14
2.2.5 Transmission Data 15
2.2.6 Synchronized Sampling 16
2.2.7 Telecommunication Circuit 16
2.2.8 Telecommunication Channel Monitoring 17
2.2.9 Setting 17
2.3 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection 20
2.3.1 Inverse Time (IDMT) Operation 20
2.3.2 Scheme Logic 23
2.3.3 Setting 25
2.4 Earth Fault Protection 28
2.4.2 Setting 29
2.5 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection 31
2.5.2 Setting 33
2.6 Phase Undercurrent Protection 34
2.6.2 Setting 35
2.7 Thermal Overload Protection 36
2.7.2 Setting 38
2.8 Broken Conductor Protection 39
2.8.2 Setting 41
2.9 Breaker Failure Protection 42
2.9.2 Setting 44
2.10 Countermeasures for Magnetising Inrush 45
2.10.1 Inrush Current Detector 45
2.10.2 Cold Load Protection 46
2.11 Transfer Trip Function 49
3. Technical Description 52
 4 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
3.1 Hardware Description 52

3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules 52
3.2 Input and Output Signals 56
3.2.1 AC Input Signals 56
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals 56
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals 57
3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function 59
3.3 Automatic Supervision 60
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision 60
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring 60
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision 61
3.3.4 Differential Current (Id) Monitoring 61
3.3.5 Telecommunication Channel Monitoring 61
3.3.6 Disconnector Monitoring 62
3.3.7 Circuit Breaker Monitoring 62
3.3.8 Failure Alarms 64
3.3.9 Trip Blocking 65
3.3.10 Setting 65
3.4 Recording Function 66
3.4.1 Fault Recording 66
3.4.2 Event Recording 67
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording 67
3.5 Metering Function 69
4. User Interface 70
4.1 Outline of User Interface 70
4.1.1 Front Panel 70
4.1.2 Communication Ports 72
4.2 Operation of the User Interface 74
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 74
4.2.2 Relay Menu 78
4.2.3 Displaying Records 80
4.2.4 Displaying the Status 85
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings 89
4.2.6 Changing the Settings 90
4.2.7 Testing 118
4.3 Personal Computer Interface 122
4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System 122
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface 123
4.6 Clock Function 123
5. Installation 124
5.1 Receipt of Relays 124
5.2 Relay Mounting 124
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 124
5.4 Handling Precautions 124
 5 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
5.5 External Connections 125

6. Commissioning and Maintenance 126
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 126
6.2 Cautions 127
6.2.1 Safety Precautions 127
6.2.2 Cautions on Tests 127
6.3 Preparations 128
6.4 Hardware Tests 129
6.4.1 User Interfaces 129
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit 129
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit 130
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits 131
6.5 Function Test 132
6.5.1 Measuring Element 132
6.5.2 Protection Scheme 140
6.5.3 Metering and Recording 140
6.6 Conjunctive Tests 141
6.6.1 On Load Test 141
6.6.2 Communication Circuit Test 141
6.6.3 Tripping Circuit Test 142
6.7 Maintenance 144
6.7.1 Regular Testing 144
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 144
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit 145
6.7.4 Resumption of Service 146
6.7.5 Storage 146
7. Putting Relay into Service 147
 6 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix A Programmable Reset Characteristics and Implementation of Thermal

Model to IEC60255-8 149
Appendix B Signal List 153
Appendix C Binary Output Default Setting List 179
Appendix D Details of Relay Menu 181
Appendix E Case Outline 195
Appendix F Typical External Connection 199
Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet 203
Appendix H Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 223
Appendix I Return Repair Form 227
Appendix J Technical Data 231
Appendix K Symbols Used in Scheme Logic 237
Appendix L Inverse Time Characteristics 241
Appendix M IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability 247
Appendix N Resistor Box (Option) 259
Appendix O Ordering 263
 The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver. 2.0)
 7 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
1. Introduction
GRL150 provides fully numerical, multi-function phase-segregated line differential protection for
use with pilot wire or direct fibre optic communication.
GRL150 has two model series which differ according to the communication interface, see Table
1.1.
Table 1.1 – GRL150 Models
Model Configuration
GRL150-100 series Pilot wire applications
GRL150-400 series Pilot wire or direct fibre optic applications
Model 100 series is for pilot wire applications. Model 400 series provides both pilot wire and fibre
optic interface and the application of communication is selectable by manual setting.
All models include multiple, high accuracy, phase-segregated protection elements with integrated
overcurrent guard scheme and continuous channel supervision.
Each of the local and remote terminals has a differential calculation function and performs
arithmetical operation independently and simultaneously.
In addition, GRL150 provides back-up overcurrent protection (for phase and/or earth fault) with
inverse time and definite time delay functions and optional sensitive earth fault protection.
All models provide continuous monitoring of internal circuits and of software. External circuits
are also monitored, by trip circuit supervision, CT supervision, and CB condition monitoring
features.
A user-friendly HMI is provided through a backlit LCD, programmable LEDs, keypad and
menu-based operating system. PC access is also provided, either for local connection via a
front-mounted RS232 port, or for remote connection via a rear-mounted RS485 or fibre optic port.
The communication system allows the user to read and modify the relay settings, and to access
data gathered by the relay’s metering and recording functions.
Password protection is provided to change settings. Four active setting groups are provided. This
allows the user to set one group for normal operating conditions while other groups may be set to
cover alternative operating conditions. Any one setting group of four different setting groups can
be selected by PLC (Programmable Logic Control) function.
Data available either via the relay HMI or communications ports includes the following functions.
 Metering
 Fault recording
 Event recording
 Disturbance recording
GRL150 provides the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol for use with substation control
and automation systems.
Table 1.1.2 shows the members of the GRL150 series and identifies the functions to be provided
by each member.
 8 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Table 2.1.2 Series Members and Functions
Model Number GRL150 -

100 110 120 400 410 420
Phase-segregated Differential Current Protection DIF (87)      
Phase Overcurrent OC (50P/51P)      
Earth Fault EF (50N/51N)  
Sensitive Earth Fault SEF (50N/51N)  
Thermal Overload THM (49)      
Phase Undercurrent UC (37P)      
Broken Conductor BCD (BC)      
Circuit Breaker Fail CBF (50BF)      
Cold Load Protection      
Trip circuit supervision      
Self supervision      
CB State Monitoring      
Trip Counter Alarm      
Iy Alarm      
CB Operate Time Alarm      
Metering      
Fault records      
Event records      
Disturbance records      
 9 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2. Application Notes
2.1 Protection schemes
The GRL150 provides the following protection schemes:
 Segregated-phase current differential protection
 Phase fault overcurrent protection
 Earth fault protection
 Sensitive earth fault protection
 Phase undercurrent protection
 Thermal overload protection
 Broken conductor protection
 Circuit breaker failure protection
 Cold load protection
2.2 Current Differential Protection

GRL150 is applied as a segregated-phase current differential protection for use with pilot wire or
direct fibre optic communication as shown in Figure 2.2.1.
For pilot wire communication, GRL150 can be applied to circuits up to 8 km in length for
0.91mm and provides built-in 5kV and optional 20kV isolation. For direct fibre optic
communication, GRL150 can be applied to circuits up to 20km in length. The fibre optic cable is
single-mode (SM) 10/125m type.
TX RX
RX TX
GRL150 GRL150
(a) Fibre optic(SM)
TB3-A16 TB3-A16
-A17 -A17
GRL150 GRL150
(b) Pilot wire
Figure 2.2.1 Current Differential Protection
 10 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.2.1 Operation of Current Differential Protection
Current differential protection compares the currents flowing into and out of the protected line.
The difference of the currents, that is, the differential current, is almost zero when a fault is
external or there is no fault, and is equal to the fault current when the fault is internal. The
differential protection operates when the difference of the currents exceeds a set value.
The GRL150 relay installed at each line terminal samples the local currents and transmits the
current data to the remote terminal via pilot wire or direct fibre optic communication. The
GRL150 performs master/master type current differential protection using the current data from
all terminals.
The GRL150 utilises the individual three phase currents to perform segregated-phase current
differential protection. The segregated-phase differential protection transmits the three phase
currents to the remote terminal, calculates the individual differential currents and detects both
phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults on a per phase basis.
Figure 2.2.1.1 shows the scheme logic of the segregated-phase current differential protection.
Output signals of differential elements DIF-A, -B and -C perform instantaneous three-phase
tripping. (See Figure 2.12.1.) The output signals of DIF-A, -B and -C are blocked when a
communication circuit failure is detected by the data error check, sampling synchronism check or
interruption of the received signals. For DIF-A_FS, -B_FS and -C_FS signals, see Section 2.2.3.
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
transformer energisation, and can block the DIF element if activated by the scheme switch
[DIF-ICD]. If the inrush current detection signal COM4-R1_UF is received from the remote
terminal, the DIF is also blocked. (See Section 2.10.) The logic sequence is configured by the
PLC.
The DIF protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [DIFEN] or by the PLC command
DIF_BLOCK.
Note: For the symbols used in the scheme logic, see Appendix K.
48
DIF-A 82 257 256
& &
& 1 DIF_TRIP
49
DIF-B 83 258
& &
&
50
DIF-C 84 259
& &
&
Communication 63
failure 1 1 RELAY_BLOCK
[DIFEN]
(+)
"ON"
1553 DIF_BLOCK 1
373 ICD 1680 DIF-A_IC_BLK 1

1 &
1099 COM4-R1_UF
1681 DIF-B_IC_BLK 1
&
1682 DIF-C_IC_BLK 1
[DIF-ICD]
&
By PLC (+)
"BLK"
264 DIFFS_OP 1584 DIF-A_FS
1585 DIF-B_FS
1586 DIF-C_FS
By PLC
Figure 2.2.1.1 Scheme Logic of Segregated-phase Current Differential Protection
 11 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.2.2 Characteristic of Current Differential Element DIF
The differential elements DIF have a percentage restraining characteristic with weak restraint in
the small current region and strong restraint in the large current region, to cope with CT saturation.
The DIF elements have dual percentage restraint characteristics. Figure 2.2.2.1 shows the
characteristics on the differential current (Id) and restraining current (Ir) plane. Id is the vector
summation of the phase current of all terminals and Ir is the scalar summation of the phase current
of all terminals.
Id
Operating
Zone
B
A
5/6 DIFI1
Small current region Large current region
0 Ir
2  DIFI2
Figure 2.2.2.1 DIF Element (Ir-Id Plane)
Characteristic A of the DIF element is expressed by the following equation:

Id  (1/6)Ir + (5/6)DIFI1
where DIFI1 is a setting and defines the minimum internal fault current.
This characteristic has weaker restraint and ensures sensitivity to low-level faults.
Characteristic B is expressed by the following equation:

Id  Ir - 2  DIFI2
where DIFI2 is a setting and its physical meaning is described later.

This characteristic has stronger restraint and prevents the element from operating falsely in
response to the erroneous differential current which is caused by saturation or transient errors of
the CT during an external fault. If the CT saturation occurs at the external fault in a small current
region of the characteristics and continues, the element may operate falsely caused by increasing
the erroneous differential current. The DIF prevents the false operation by enhancing the
restraining quantity for the DIF calculation, depending on the magnitude of restraining current in
the large current region characteristic B.
The figure shows how the operation sensitivity varies depending on the restraining current.
The same characteristic can be represented on the outflowing current (Iout) and infeeding current
(Iin) plane as shown in Figure 2.2.2.2.
 12 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Iout
Iout = Iin
DIFI2
B
Operating
A Zone
0 DIFI1 Iin
Figure 2.2.2.2 DIF Element (Iin-Iout Plane)
Characteristic A is expressed by the following equation:

Iout  (5/7)(Iin - DIFI1)
Characteristic B is expressed by the following equation:
Iout  DIFI2
2.2.3 Fail-safe Function (Overcurrent Guard Scheme)
GRL150 provides OC5 and OCD elements which provide an overcurrent guard scheme for
fail-safe operation. OC5 is a phase overcurrent element and its sensitivity can be set. OCD is a
phase current change detection element and its sensitivity is fixed.
The scheme logic is shown in Figure 2.2.3.1. The output of DIFFS_OP is connected to DIF-A_FS,
DIF-B_FS, DIF-C_FS respectively by PLC function.
The fail-safe function is disabled by the [DIF-FS] switch. By [DIF-FS], OC5 or OCD or both
elements can be selected. If the switch is set to “OFF”, the signal of DIFFS_OP is “1” and the
fail-safe is disabled.
64 265 By PLC
OC5-A & 1 DIFFS-A_OP
264
65 266 1584 DIF-A_FS
1 DIFFS_OP
OC5-B & 1 DIFFS-B_OP 1585 DIF-B_FS
1586 DIF-C_FS
66 267
(see Fig. 2.2.1.1.)
OC5-C & 1 DIFFS-C_OP
68
OCD-A
&
69
OCD-B
&
70
OCD-C
&
[DIF-FS]
+
"OC" 1
"OCD" 1
"BOTH"
"OFF"
Figure 2.2.3.1 Fail-safe Logic
 13 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Current change detection element OCD

The OCD operates if the vectorial difference between currents IM and IN observed one cycle apart
is larger than the fixed setting. Therefore, the operating sensitivity of this element is not affected
by the quiescent load current and can detect a fault current with high sensitivity.
The operation decision is made according to the following equation:
IM - IN  Is
where,
IM = present current
IN = current one cycle before
Is = fixed setting (8% of rated current)
IN
Is
IM
Figure 2.2.3.2 Current Change Detection
2.2.4 Open Terminal (Out-of-Service) Detection
Erroneous current data may be transmitted from the remote terminal when the remote relay is
out-of-service for testing or other purposes. To prevent false operation in this case, the relay sets
the receiving current data to zero in the differential current calculation upon detecting that the
remote terminal is out-of-service.
Figure 2.2.4.1 shows the remote terminal out-of-service detection logic. The local terminal can
detect that the remote terminal is out-of-service if it receives no interlink signal I.LINK-R1 from
the remote terminal. The interlink signal is configured from the circuit breaker CB and
disconnector DS status signal shown in Figure 2.2.4.2. Each terminal detects the out-of-service
condition and transmits its signal I.LINK to the other. Thus, out-of-service is detected when either
the circuit breaker or disconnector are open in all three phases.
The local terminal detects that the remote terminal is out-of-service by receiving a signal
L.TEST-R1 which is transmitted when the scheme switch [L. TEST] is set to "ON" at the terminal
under test.
1092 COM5-R1 1651 I.LINK-R1 1 432

& 1 1 REM1_IN_SRV
By PLC
[OTD]
(+) 433
"ON" 1 REM1_OFF_SRV
1104 SUB.COM1-R1 1650 L.TEST-R1 By PLC

By PLC 2056 SUB.COM1-S1
LOCAL_TEST
1 REM1_IN_SRV: Remote terminal in-service
1587 R.DATA_ZERO REM1_OFF_SRV: Remote terminal out-of-service
Figure 2.2.4.1 Out-of-Service Detection Logic
 14 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
CB_CLOSE By PLC
384 388
528 BI1-COM-T 1536 CB_N/O_CONT I.LINK 2052
1 1 & COM5-S
385
529 BI2-COM-T 1537 CB_N/C_CONT 1 1 CB_OPEN
532 BI5-COM-T 1547 EXT_CB_CLOSE

386
DS_CLOSE
530 BI3-COM-T 1538 DS_N/O_CONT
1
387
531 BI4-COM-T 1539 DS_N/C_CONT 1 1 DS_OPEN
By PLC
Figure 2.2.4.2 Inter-Link detection
2.2.5 Transmission Data
The following data are transmitted every 60 electrical degrees for pilot wire communication or
every 30 electrical degrees for direct fibre optic communication to the remote terminal:
A-phase current
B-phase current
C-phase current
Sampling synchronization control signal
Synchronized test trigger signal
User-programmable commands
Sampled current data, for the current and previous samples, are transmitted to the remote terminal
in pairs.
In addition to the above data, cyclic redundancy check bits are transmitted to monitor the
communication channel. If a communication failure is detected at the local terminal, the output of
differential protection is blocked.
A synchronized test trigger signal is used to test the differential protection simultaneously at all
terminals. For details, see Section 4.2.7.4.
User programmable commands

Any signals (On/off data) shown in Appendix B can be assigned to COM1 to COM5, SUB_COM1
to SUB_COM5 and SUB2_COM1 to SUB2_COM12 as user programmable commands by using
the PLC function. The default setting is as follows:
Asigned Asigned
by PLC by PLC
Send signal Send Receive Receive signal
name command command name
Default signal Command Command Default signal

No. Name (send) (receive) No. Name
-- -- COM1-S COM1-R1 / -R1_UF -- --
-- -- COM2-S COM2-R1 / -R1_UF -- --
-- -- COM3-S COM3-R1 / -R1_UF -- --
374 ICD_BLK-S COM4-S COM4-R1_UF See Figure 2.2.1.1.
388 I.LINK COM5-S COM5-R1 1651 I.LINK-R1
390 LOCAL_TEST SUB_COM1-S SUB_COM1-R1 1650 L.TEST-R1
(reserved) () SUB_COM2-S SUB_COM2-R1 -- --
(reserved) () SUB_COM3-S SUB_COM3-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB_COM4-S SUB_COM4-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB_COM5-S SUB_COM5-R1 -- --
 15 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Default signal Command Command Default signal

No. Name (send) (receive) No. Name
-- -- SUB2_COM1-S SUB2_COM1-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB2_COM2-S SUB2_COM2-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB2_COM3-S SUB2_COM3-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB2_COM4-S SUB2_COM4-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB2_COM5-S SUB2_COM5-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB2_COM6-S SUB2_COM6-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB2_COM7-S SUB2_COM7-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB2_COM8-S SUB2_COM8-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB2_COM9-S SUB2_COM9-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB2_COM10-S SUB2_COM10-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB2_COM11-S SUB2_COM11-R1 -- --
-- -- SUB2_COM12-S SUB2_COM12-R1 -- --
Note(): used in the relay system.
2.2.6 Synchronized Sampling
The GRL150 performs synchronized simultaneous sampling at all terminals of the protected line.
This synchronized sampling requires neither an external reference clock nor synchronization of
the internal clocks of the relays at different terminals.
The sampling synchronization is realized through timing synchronization control.
Timing synchronization
One of the terminals is selected as the time reference terminal and set as the master terminal. The
other terminal is set as the slave terminal. The scheme switch [SP.SYN] is used for the settings.
Note: The master and slave terminals are set only for the convenience of the sampling timing
synchronization. The GRL150s at both terminals perform identical protection functions and
operate simultaneously.
Timing synchronization is performed using the receiving time for a data frame.
To perform timing synchronization for the slave terminal, the timing signal is sent from the master
terminal to the slave terminal and the sampling time of the slave terminal relay is synchronized
with the receiving time at the slave terminal.
Master 1 2
terminal t
TdR
Slave
terminal t
1 2
Sampling
timing
Figure 2.2.6.1 Timing Synchronization
2.2.7 Telecommunication Circuit
The GRL150 can be provided with two types of telecommunications interface, an electrical
interface (pilot wire) and a fibre optic interface. For pilot wire communication, GRL150 can be
applied to circuits up to 8 km in length on 0.9 mm pilot wire cable or up to 2.5 km length on 0.5
mm pilot wire cable.
 16 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Note: GRL150 operation depends on the transmission performance of the pilot wire cable and the
noise environment, and where these are poor the circuit lengths quoted above may not be
achievable.
The GRL150-100 series is applied to pilot wire communication only. The GRL150-400 series can
be applied to pilot wire communication or fibre optic communication by scheme switch
[COM.I/F]. In the case of pilot wire communication, the [COM.I/F] is set to “PW”. For fibre optic
communication, it is set to “OPT”.
In pilot wire communication, a receiving signal adjusting function is provided, since the receiving
level is influenced by pilot-wire cable size, distance and installation environment. The receiving
signal can be adjusted automatically (Auto) or manually (Manual) by the scheme switch
[RL-MODE]. When “Auto” is selected, the optimum signal receiving level, which has the least CF
(Communication Failure), is automatically set according to the receiving level (peak value).
“Auto” is generally selected in normal operation. However, if a severe noise environment prevents
correct operation of GRL150, then “Manual” can be selected and the receiving level is chosen
manually. (Refer to Section 4.2.3.4, 4.2.6.5 and 6.6.2.)
If the transmitting signal interferes with other communication signals in a multi-core pilot wire
cable, the optional G1RE1 resistor box is available for reducing the transmission level. (Refer to
Appendix N.)
2.2.8 Telecommunication Channel Monitoring
If a failure occurs or noise causes a disturbance in the telecommunication channel, they may
interrupt the data transmission or generate erroneous data, thus causing the relay to operate
incorrectly.
The GRL150 detects data failures by performing a cyclic redundancy check on the data. The
checks are carried out for every sample. (See Section 3.3.5.)
If the failure lasts for ten seconds, a communication failure alarm is issued.
Current differential protection is blocked instantaneously upon detection of a communication
failure. The output blocking ceases instantly when the failure recovers.
2.2.9 Setting
The following shows the setting elements necessary for the current differential protection and their
setting ranges. The settings can be made on the LCD screen or PC screen.
Element Range Step Default Remarks

DIF Phase current
DIFI1 0.50  10.00A 0.01A 5.00A Small current region
(0.10  2.00A 0.01A 1.00A)(*1)
DIFI2 1.0  120.0A 0.1A 15.0A Large current region
(0.2  24.0A 0.1A 3.0A)
OC5 0.1 – 250.0A 0.1A 2.5A OC5 threshold setting for fail-safe
(0.02 – 50.00A 0.01 A 0.5A)
DIFSV 50 – 100% 1% 50% Differential current Id monitoring
TIDSV 0 – 60s 1s 10s Timer for Id monitoring
[SP.SYN] Master/Slave Master(*2) Sampling synchronization
[COM.I/F] PW / OPT OPT Only for model 400 series
 17 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
[RL-MODE] Auto / Manual Auto Signal receiving level adjusting mode

M. RL 1.0 – 100.0% 0.1% 20.0% Signal receiving level (% of peak value)
[OTD] ON/OFF OFF Open terminal detection
[DIFEN] ON/OFF ON DIF enable
[DIF-FS] OFF / OC / OCD / OFF Fail-safe function
Both
[DIF-ICD] NA / BLK NA DIF blocked by inrush current
(*1) Current values shown in parentheses are in the case of 1A rating. Other current values are in the
case of 5A rating.
(*2) In the actual setting, one terminal is set to "Master" and the other terminal to "Slave".
CT Ratio matching
If the CT ratios at the local and remote terminals are different, then CT ratio matching can be
applied as follows:
The differential element settings are respectively set to the setting values so that the primary fault
detecting current is the same value at all terminals. Figure 2.2.9.1 shows an example of CT ratio
matching. The settings for DIFI2 and DIFSV should also be set with relation to the primary
current in the same manner of the DIFI1 setting.
Primary sensitivity = 800A
Terminal-A Terminal-B
GRL150 GRL150
CT ratio : 2000/1A CT ratio : 4000/1A
DIFI1=800A / CT ratio(2000/1A) DIFI1=800A / CT ratio(4000/1A)

= 0.4A = 0.2A
Figure 2.2.9.1 Example of CT Ratio Matching
If the CT secondary ratings at the local and remote terminals are different, relay model suitable for
the CT secondary rating is used at each teminal and then CT ratio matching can be applied the
same as above. The differential element settings are respectively set to the setting values so that
the primary fault detecting current is the same value at all terminals. Figure 2.2.9.2 shows an
example of CT ratio matching. The settings for DIFI2 and DIFSV should also be set with relation
to the primary current in the same manner of the DIFI1 setting.
Primary sensitivity = 800A
Terminal-A Terminal-B
GRL150 GRL150
1A rated model 5A rated model
CT ratio : 2000/1A CT ratio : 2000/5A
DIFI1=800A / CT ratio(2000/1A) DIFI1=800A / CT ratio(2000/5A)

= 0.4A = 2.0A
Figure 2.2.9.2 Example of CT Ratio Matching incase of Different CT secondary Rating
 18 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
DIFI1 setting and Full-scale

GRL150 transmits current data to the remote terminal after the CT matching. The current data is
normalized by the DIFI1 setting value. Therfore, the full-scale of the current data is expressed by
the following equation depending on the DIFI1 setting.
IFS = DIFI1  32 (A)
where, IFS: Full-scale of current data
When setting DIFI1, it must be ensured that IFS is greater than the maximum fault current.
Setting of DIFI1
The setting of DIFI1 is determined considering the minimum internal fault current for which the
relay should operate and the maximum erroneous differential current (mainly the internal charging
current) during normal service conditions for which the relay should not operate.
DIFI1 should therefore be set to satisfy the following equation:
KIc  DIFI1  If / K
where,
K: Setting margin (K = 1.2 to 1.5)
Ic: Internal charging current
I f: Minimum internal fault current
Setting of DIFI2
The setting of DIFI2 is determined from the following three criteria:
 Maximum erroneous current generated by CT saturation in case of an external fault
 Maximum load current
 Maximum outflow current in case of an internal fault
In the case of the first criterion, DIFI2 should be set as small as possible so that unwanted
operation is not caused by the maximum erroneous current generated by CT saturation during
heavy through current for an external fault. It is recommended normally to set DIFI2 to 2In (In:
secondary rated current) for this criterion.
For the second criterion, DIFI2 should be set large enough such that it does not encroach on load
current.
For the third criterion, the maximum outflow current must be considered. DIFI2 should be set
larger than the largest possible value of outflow current in the case of an internal fault.
In two terminal network, the maximum outflow current is the maximum load current.
Setting of DIFSV
When using the differential current monitoring function, the setting of DIFSV is determined from
the maximum erroneous differential current during normal service conditions.
KIerr  DIFSV  DIFI1 / (1.5 to 2)
Ierr: maximum erroneous differential current
Setting of [SP.SYN]
One terminal must be set to "Master" and the other terminal to "Slave".
 19 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.3 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection

GRL150 provides three phase overcurrent protection with four independent overcurrent
thresholds OC1 to OC4. The first threshold OC1 may be set for inverse time or definite time
operation. If inverse time is selected, then any one of nine curves may be chosen, including IEC
and IEEE/ANSI standard characteristics.
OC1 has a programmable reset feature, selectable for instantaneous, definite time or dependent
time reset. This feature can be used to protect against flashing fault conditions, or to grade
correctly with electromechanical overcurrent relays.
The other overcurrent thresholds OC2 to OC4 may be set for definite time, or instantaneous
operation. These elements are immune to the effects of transformer magnetising inrush and dc
offset transient over-reach.
All elements can be inhibited by binary input signals for operation in blocked overcurrent
schemes.
2.3.1 Inverse Time (IDMT) Operation
The overcurrent protection element OC1 has the IDMT characteristics defined by equation (1):
  
 k   c 
t  TMS  

 
 I Is  1 
 a
 
(1)
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
I = energising current (amps),
Is = overcurrent setting (amps),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, a, c = constants defining curve.
Nine curve types are available as defined in Table 2.3.1.1. They are illustrated in Figure 2.3.1.1.
Detail curves for each IDMT are shown in Appendix L.
Any one curve can selected for each IDMT element by scheme switches [M] and [MC-].
Table 2.3.1.1 Specification of IDMT Curves

Curve Description Operating characteristic Resetting characteristic
k a c kr b
IEC Normal Inverse (NI) 0.14 0.02 0 - -
IEC Very Inverse (VI) 13.5 1 0 - -
IEC Extremely Inverse (EI) 80 2 0 - -
UK Long Time Inverse (LTI) 120 1 0 - -
IEEE Moderately Inverse (MI) 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85 2
IEEE Very Inverse (VI) 19.61 2 0.491 21.6 2
IEEE Extremely Inverse (EI) 28.2 2 0.1217 29.1 2
US CO8 Inverse 5.95 2 0.18 5.95 2
US CO2 Short Time Inverse 0.02394 0.02 0.01694 2.261 2
Note: kr, b are used to define the reset characteristic. Refer to equation (2).
 20 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
In addition to the above nine curve types, the OC1 can provide a user configurable IDMT curve. If
required, set the scheme switch [M] to “CON” and set the curve defining constants k, a, c, kr
and b. The following table shows the setting ranges of the curve defining constants.
Table 2.3.1.2 Setting Range of IDMT Curves
Curve defining constants Range Step Remarks

k 0.00 – 300.00 0.01 Operating characteristic
a 0.00 – 5.00 0.01 ([M]=CON setting)
c 0.000 – 5.000 0.001
kr 0.00 – 300.00 0.01 Resetting characteristic
b 0.00 – 5.00 0.01 ([M]=CON, and [R]=DEP setting)
IEC/UK Inverse Curves IEEE/US Inverse Curves

(Time Multiplier = 1) (Time Multiplier = 1)
1000 100
100
10
Operating Time (s)
Operating Time (s)
10
LTI
NI 1 MI
1 VI
VI
CO2
EI
CO8
EI
0.1 0.1
1 10 100 1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting) Current (Multiple of Setting)
Figure 2.3.1.1 IDMT Characteristics
Programmable Reset Characteristics

OC1 has a programmable reset feature: instantaneous, definite time delayed, or dependent time
delayed reset. (Refer to Appendix A for a more detailed description.)
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct
grading between relays at various points in the scheme.
The dependent time delayed reset characteristic is particularly useful for providing correct
coordination with an upstream induction disc type overcurrent relay.
 21 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of
intermittent (‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions.
Definite time reset

The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the IEC/IEEE/US operating characteristics.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising current falls below the reset threshold, the
element returns to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising current exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising current falls below the
reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing
function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Dependent time reset

The dependent time resetting characteristic is applied only to the IEEE/US operate characteristics,
and is defined by the following equation:
 
 kr 
t  RTMS    (2)
 I  
b
1   I S  
where:
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energising current (amps),
Is = overcurrent setting (amps),
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energising current is zero
(see Table 2.3.1.1),
RTMS = reset time multiplier setting.
b = constant defining curve.
Figure 2.3.1.2 illustrates the dependent time reset characteristics.
 22 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
IEEE Reset Curves

(Time Multiplier = 1)
1000.00
100.00
Time (s)
EI
VI
10.00
CO8
MI
CO2
1.00
0.1 1
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Figure 2.3.1.2 Dependent Time Reset Characteristics
2.3.2 Scheme Logic
Figures 2.3.2.1 to 2.3.2.2 show the scheme logic of the phase overcurrent protection OC1 to OC4.
OC1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in Figure
2.3.1.1. The definite time protection is selected by setting [MOC1] to “DT” and trip signal OC1
TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TOC1. The inverse time protection is selected by
setting [MOC1] to any one of “IEC”, “IEEE”, “US” or “CON” and then setting [MOC1C]
according to the required IDMT characteristic, and trip signal OC1 TRIP is given.
Figure 2.3.2.3 to Figure 2.3.2.4 show the scheme logic of the definite time phase overcurrent
protection OC2 to OC4. The OC2 to OC4 give trip and alarm signals OC2 TRIP, OC3 TRIP and
OC4 ALARM through the delayed pick-up timers TOC2 to TOC4 respectively.
The signal OC1-INST to OC4-INST are available to trip instantaneously for a fault.
The OC1 to OC4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [OC1EN] to [OC4EN] or the
binary input signals OC1 BLOCK to OC4 BLOCK respectively.
transformer energisation, and can block the OC elements by the scheme switch [OC-ICD]. See
Section 2.10. The logic sequence is configured by the PLC.
Note: For the symbols used in the scheme logic, see Appendix K.
 23 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
TOC1
80
OC1-A t 0 273 272
1 & &
81 1 1 OC1_TRIP
OC1-B
274
82 1 & t 0
OC1-C & 1
275
1 t 0
96
& & 1
OC1-A_INST & 0.00 - 300.00s
97
OC1-B_INST
&
98
OC1-A_INST &
&
&
1620 OC1_INST_TP
1
[MOC1] &
+
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US" 1556 OC1_BLOCK 1

"CON"
"DT" OC1-EN
+ "ON"
&
373
ICD 1683 OC_IC_BLK &
1
By PLC [OC-ICD]
(+)
"BLK"
Figure 2.3.2.1 OC1 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection
84 TOC2
OC2-A t 0 277 276
& 1
85 1 OC2_TRIP
OC2-B t 0 278
& 1
86
OC2-C t 0 279
&
OC2-EN 1
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "ON"
&
373
ICD 1683 OC_IC_BLK 1
& &
By PLC [OC-ICD]
(+)
"BLK" &
1557 OC2_BLOCK 1
&
1621 OC2_INST_TP
Figure 2.3.2.2 OC2 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection
88 TOC3
OC3-A t 0 281 280
& 1
89 1 OC3_TRIP
OC3-B t 0 282
& 1
90
OC3-C t 0 283
&
OC3-EN 1
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "ON"
&
373
& &
By PLC [OC-ICD]
(+)
"BLK" &
1558 OC3_BLOCK 1
&
1622 OC3_INST_TP
Figure 2.3.2.3 OC3 Phase Overcurrent Protection
 24 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
92 TOC4
OC4-A t 0 285 284
& 1
93 1 OC4_ALARM
OC4-B t 0 286
& 1
94
OC4-C t 0 287
&
OC4-EN 1
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "ON"
&
373
& &
By PLC [OC-ICD]
(+)
"BLK" &
1559 OC4_BLOCK 1
&
1623 OC4_INST_TP
Figure 2.3.2.4 OC4 Phase Overcurrent Protection
2.3.3 Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the phase overcurrent protection and their
setting ranges.
OC1 0.1 – 25.0 A 0.1 A 5.0 A OC1 threshold setting
(0.02 – 5.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (1.00 A)
TOC1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OC1 definite time setting. Required if [MOC1] = DT.
TOC1M 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 OC1 time multiplier setting. Required if [MOC1] =
(TMS) IEC, IEEE, US or CON.
TOC1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OC1 definite time delayed reset. Required if [OC1R]
= DEF.
TOC1RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 OC1 dependent time delayed reset time multiplier.
(RTMS) Required if [OC1R] = DEP.
(0.02 – 5.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (1.00 A)
TOC2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OC2 definite time setting.
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (10.00 A)
TOC3 0.00 – 300.0 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OC3 definite time setting
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (20.00 A)
TOC4 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OC4 definite time setting
[OC1EN] Off / On On OC1 Enable
[MOC1] DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON DT OC1 time characteristic
[MOC1C] OC1 inverse curve type.
MOC1C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MOC1] = IEC.
MOC1C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MOC1] = IEEE.
MOC1C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MOC1] = US.
[OC1R] DEF / DEP DEF OC1 reset characteristic. Required if [MOC1] =
IEEE, US or CON.
[OC2EN] Off / On Off OC2 Enable
 25 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8

[OC-ICD] NA / BLK NA OC/EF/SEF blocked by irush current
(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
the case of a 5 A rating.
Inverse Time Protection
Current setting
In Figure 2.3.3.1, the current setting at terminal A is set lower than the minimum fault current in
the event of a fault at remote end F1. Furthermore, when considering also backup protection of a
fault within the adjacent lines, it is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault
at remote end F3. For grading of the current settings, the terminal furthest from the power source is
set to the lowest value and the terminals closer to the power source are set to a higher value.
The minimum setting is restricted so as not to operate on false zero-sequence currents caused by an
unbalance in the load current, errors in the current transformer circuits or zero-sequence mutual
coupling of parallel lines.
A B C
F1 F2 F3
Figure 2.3.3.1 Current Settings in Radial System
Time setting
Time setting is performed to provide selectivity in relation with the relays on the adjacent lines.
Suppose a minimum source impedance when the current flowing in the relay becomes the
maximum. In Figure 2.3.3.1, in the event of a fault at near end F2 of the adjacent line, the
operating time is set so that terminal A may operate by time grading Tc behind terminal B. The
current flowing in the relays may sometimes be greater when the remote end of the adjacent line is
open. At this time, time coordination must also be kept.
The reason why the operating time is set when the fault current reaches the maximum is that if time
coordination is obtained for large fault current, then time coordination can also be obtained for
small fault current as long as relays with the same operating characteristic are used for each
terminal.
The grading margin Tc of terminal A and terminal B is given by the following expression for a
fault at point F2 in Figure 2.3.3.1.
Tc = T1 + T2 + M
where, T1: circuit breaker clearance time at B
T2: relay reset time at A
M: margin
When single-phase autoreclose is used, the minimum time of the earth fault overcurrent protection
must be set longer than the time from fault occurrence to reclosing of the circuit breaker. This is to
prevent three-phase final tripping from being executed by the overcurrent protection during a
single-phase autoreclose cycle.
 26 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Definite Time Protection

In a system in which a fault current does not vary significantly with the position of the fault, the
advantages of the IDMT characteristics are less apparent. In this case, definite time overcurrent
protection is applied. The operating time can be set irrespective of the magnitude of the fault
current.
Definite time overcurrent protection consists of instantaneous overcurrent elements with on-delay
timers.
Identical current values can be set for all terminals, but graded settings are better than identical
settings in order to provide a margin for current sensitivity. The further from the power source the
terminal is located, the higher sensitivity (i.e. the lower setting) is required.
The operating time of the overcurrent element of each terminal is constant irrespective of the
magnitude of the fault current and selective protection is implemented by graded settings of the
on-delay timer. As a result, the circuit breaker of the terminal most remote from the power source
is tripped in the shortest time.
When setting the on-delay timers, time grading margin Tc is obtained in the same way as
explained in the inverse time protection setting.
 27 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.4 Earth Fault Protection

The standard earth fault protection is available in models 110/410, and provides four independent
overcurrent thresholds EF1 to EF4. Protection functionality is the same as for the phase fault
elements, only with more sensitive current thresholds.
For models 110/410, the earth fault quantity is measured directly by connecting the input in the
residual circuit of the phase CTs.
2.4.1 Scheme Logic
Figure 2.4.1.1 to Figure 2.4.1.4 show the scheme logic of the earth fault protection EF1 to EF4.
The EF1 protection provides selective definite time or inverse time characteristic as shown in
Figure 2.4.1.1. The definite time protection is selected by setting [MEF1] to “DT”, and the trip
signal EF1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TEF1. The inverse time protection is
selected by setting [MEF1] to any one of “IEC”, “IEEE”, “US” or “CON” and then setting
[MEF1C] according to the required IDMT characteristic, and the trip signal EF1 TRIP is given.
Figure 2.4.1.2 to Figure 2.4.1.4 show the scheme logic of the definite time earth fault protection
EF2 to EF4. The EF2 to EF4 give trip and alarm signals EF2 TRIP, EF3 TRIP and EF4 ALARM
through the delayed pick-up timers TEF2, TEF3 and TEF4 respectively.
The signal EF1-INST to EF4-INST are available to trip instantaneously for a fault.
The EF1 to EF4 protection can be disabled by the scheme switches [EF1EN] to [EF4EN] or the
binary input signals EF1 BLOCK to EF4 BLOCK respectively.
transformer energisation, and can block the EF elements by the scheme switch [OC-ICD]. See
Section 2.10. The logic logic sequence is configured by the PLC.
TEF1
112
EF1 1 t 0 292
& &
1 EF1_TRIP
EF1 128 0.00 - 300.00s

(INST) &
&
1624 EF1_INST_TP
1
[MEF1]
+
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
"CON"
"DT"
EF1-EN
+ "ON"
&
373
1
By PLC [OC-ICD]
(+)
"BLK"
1560 EF1_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.1.1 EF1 Earth Fault Protection
 28 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
TEF2
113 t 0 293
EF2 EF2_TRIP
& 1
EF2-EN 0.00 - 300.00s
+ "ON"
&
373
& &
By PLC [OC-ICD]
(+)
"BLK"
1625 EF2_INST_TP
1561 EF2_BLOCK 1
TEF3
114 t 0 294
EF3_TRIP
EF3 1
&
EF3-EN 0.00 - 300.00s
+ "ON"
&
373
& &
By PLC [OC-ICD]
(+)
"BLK"
1626 EF3_INST_TP
1562 EF3_BLOCK 1
TEF4
115 t 0 295
EF4_ALARM
EF4 1
&
EF4-EN 0.00 - 300.00s
+ "ON"
&
373
& &
By PLC [OC-ICD]
(+)
"BLK"
1627 EF2_INST_TP
1563 EF2_BLOCK 1
2.4.2 Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the earth fault protection and their setting
ranges.
EF1 0.1 – 25.0 A 0.1 A 1.5 A EF1 threshold setting
(0.02 – 5.00 A) (0.01 A) (0.30 A)
TEF1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s EF1 definite time setting. Required if [MEF1]
= DT.
TEF1M 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 EF1 time multiplier setting. Required if
(TMS) [MEF1] = IEC, IEEE, US or CON.
TEF1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s EF1 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[EF1R] = DEF.
 29 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8

TEF1RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 EF1 dependent time delayed reset time
(RTMS) multiplier. Required if [EF1R] = DEP.
(0.02 – 5.00 A) (0.01 A) (0.30 A)
TEF2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s EF2 definite time setting.
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (5.00 A)
TEF3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s EF3 definite time setting
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (10.00 A)
TEF4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s EF4 definite time setting
[EF1EN] Off / On On EF1 Enable
[MEF1] DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON DT EF1 time characteristic
[MEF1C] EF1 inverse curve type.
MEF1C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MEF1] = IEC.
MEF1C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MEF1] = IEEE.
MEF1C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MEF1] = US.
[EF1R] DEF / DEP DEF EF1 reset characteristic. Required if [MEF1]
= IEEE, US or CON.
[EF2EN] Off / On Off EF2 Enable
[OC-ICD] NA / BLK NA OC/EF/SEF blocked by inrush current
(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
 30 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.5 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection

GRL150-120/420 provides earth fault protection with more sensitive settings for use in
applications where the fault current magnitude may be very low. A four-stage overcurrent
function is provided, with the first stage programmable for inverse time or definite time operation.
Three additional overcurrent thresholds are provided, each with a definite time delay.
The sensitive earth fault quantity is measured directly, using a dedicated core balance earth fault
CT.
The SEF elements provide 20 times more sensitive setting ranges (25 mA to 125 mA in 5A rating)
than the regular earth fault protection.
Since very low levels of current setting may be applied, there is a danger of unwanted operation
due to harmonics of the power system frequency, which can appear as residual current. Therefore
the SEF elements operate only on the fundamental component, rejecting all higher harmonics.
The SEF protection is provided in Model 120 and 420 series which have a dedicated earth fault
input circuit.
The element SEF1 provides inverse time or definite time selective two-stage protection. SEF2 to
SEF4 provide definite time protection.
In applications of SEF protection, it must be ensured that any erroneous zero-phase current is
sufficiently low compared to the fault current, so that a highly sensitive setting is available.
The erroneous current may be caused with load current due to unbalanced configuration of the
distribution lines, or mutual coupling from adjacent lines. The value of the erroneous current
during normal conditions can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay front panel.
The earth fault current for SEF may be fed from a core balance CT, but if it is derived from three
phase CTs, the erroneous current may be caused also by the CT error in phase faults. Transient
false functioning may be prevented by a relatively long time delay.
2.5.1 Scheme Logic
Figure 2.5.1.1 to 2.5.1.4 show the scheme logic of sensitive earth fault protection.
Figure 2.5.1.1 shows the scheme logic of sensitive earth fault protection SEF1 with inverse time or
definite time selective two-stage overcurrent protection. The definite time protection is selected by
setting [MSE1] to “DT”. The element SEF1 is enabled for sensitive earth fault protection and
stage 1 trip signal SEF1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TSE1. The inverse time
protection is selected by setting [MSE1] to either “IEC”, “IEEE”, “US” or “CON” and then setting
[MEF1C] according to the required IDMT characteristic. The element SEF1 is enabled and stage 1
trip signal SEF1 TRIP is given.
Both protections provide stage 2 trip signal SEF1-S2 through a delayed pick-up timer TSE12.
Figure 2.5.1.2 to Figure 2.5.1.4 show the scheme logic of the definite time sensitive earth fault
protection SEF2 to SEF4. SEF2 to SEF4 give trip and alarm signals SEF2 TRIP, SEF3 TRIP and
SEF4 ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TSE2, TSE3 and TSE4 respectively.
The signal SE1-INST to SE4-INST are available to trip instantaneously for a fault.
The SEF1 to SEF4 protections can be disabled by the scheme switches [SE1EN] to [SE4EN] or
binary input signals SEF1 BLOCK to SEF4 BLOCK. The SEF1 stage 2 trip of standby earth fault
protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [SE1S2].
transformer energisation, and can block the SEF elements by the scheme switch [OC-ICD]. See
Section 2.10. The logic logic sequence is configured by the PLC.
 31 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
116 TSE1
SEF1 t 0
1 & 300
1 SEF1_TRIP
132 0.00 - 300.00s
SEF1
INST &
&
1628 SEF1_INST_TP
1
[MSE1]
+
"DT"
"IEC" TSE12
[SE1S2] t 0 301
& SEF1-S2_
+
"IEEE" "ON" 0.00 - 300.00s TRIP
"US" SE1-EN
+ "ON"
"CON" &
373
&
By PLC [OC-ICD]
(+)
"BLK"
1564 SEF1_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.5.1.1 SEF1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
TSE2
117 t 0 302
SEF2_TRIP
SEF2
& 1
SE2-EN
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "ON"
&
373
1
By PLC [OC-ICD] &
(+)
"BLK"
1629 SEF2_INST_TP
1565 SEF2_BLOCK 1
TSE3
118 t 0 303
SEF3_TRIP
SEF3
& 1
SE3-EN
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "ON"
&
373
1
By PLC [OC-ICD] &
(+)
"BLK"
1630 SEF3_INST_TP
1566 SEF3_BLOCK 1
TSE4
119 t 0 304
SEF4_ALARM
SEF4
& 1
SE4-EN
0.00 - 300.00s
+ "ON"
&
373
1
By PLC [OC-ICD] &
(+)
"BLK"
1631 SEF4_INST_TP
1567 SEF4_BLOCK 1
 32 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.5.2 Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the sensitive earth fault protection and
their setting ranges.
SE1 0.025 – 0.125 A 0.001 A 0.050 A SEF1 threshold setting
(0.005 – 0.025 A)(*) (0.001 A) (0.010 A)
TSE1M 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 SEF1 inverse time multiplier setting.
(TMS) Required if [MSE1] = IEC, IEEE, US or
CON.
TSE1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s SEF1 definite time setting. Required if
[MSE1] = DT.
TSE1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s SEF1 definite time delayed reset. Required
if [MSE1] = IEC or [SE1R] = DEF.
TSE1RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 SEF1 dependent time delayed reset time
(RTMS) multiplier. Required if [SE1R] = DEP.
TSE12 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s SEF1 stage 2 definite time setting
(0.005 – 0.025 A)(*) (0.001 A) (0.010 A)
TSE2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s SEF2 definite time setting.
(0.005 – 0.025 A)(*) (0.001 A) (0.010 A)
(0.005 – 0.025 A)(*) (0.001 A) (0.010 A)
[SE1EN] Off / On Off SEF1 Enable
[MSE1] DT/IEC/IEEE/US/CON DT SEF1 characteristic
[MSE1C] SEF1 inverse curve type.
MSE1C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MSE1] = IEC.
MSE1C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MSE1] = IEEE.
MSE1C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MSE1] = US.
[SE1R] DEF / DEP DEF SEF1 reset characteristic. Required if
[MSE1] = IEEE or US.
[SE1S2] Off / On Off SEF1 stage 2 timer enable
[OC-ICD] NA / BLK NA OC/EF/SEF blocked by irush current
(*) Current values shown in parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in the
case of a 5 A rating.
 33 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.6 Phase Undercurrent Protection

Phase undercurrent protection is used to detect a decrease in current caused by a loss of load. Two
independent stages UC1 and UC2 are provided, each with a programmable definite time delay.
The undercurrent element operates for current falling through the threshold level. The operation
can be blocked by UCDO element when the current falls below 4 % of CT secondary rating to
discriminate the loss of load from the feeder tripping by other protection. The UCDO element
output is input by PLC. Figure 2.6.1.1 shows the undercurrent element characteristic.
Setting value
Operating zone
0.04In
0 0 I
I
In: rated current
(1) UC1, 2 (2) UCDO
Figure 2.6.1.1 Undercurrent Element Characteristic
Each phase has two independent undercurrent elements for tripping and alarming. The elements
are programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation.
The undercurrent element operates on per phase basis, although tripping and alarming is three-
phase only.
2.6.1 Scheme Logic
Figure 2.6.1.2 shows the scheme logic of the phase undercurrent protection.
The undercurrent elements UC1 and UC2 output UC1 TRIP and UC2 ALARM through delayed
pick-up timers TUC1 and TUC2.
This protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [UC1EN] and [UC2EN] or binary input
signals UC1 BLOCK and UC2 BLOCK.
 34 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
TUC1
176
S
t 0 309 308
UC1-A
1600 UC1-A_DO R & 1 1 UC1 TRIP
177 t 0 310
UC1-B S
& 1
178
1601 UC1-B_DO R 311
UC1-C S
t 0
& 1
1602 UC1-C_DO R 0.00 - 300.00s
200 By PLC
UCDO A [UC1EN]
201 &
I B +
"ON"
0.04In 202 &
C
1568 UC1_BLOCK 1 &
1632 UC1_INST_TP
TUC2
UC2-A
180
S t 0 313 312
1604 UC2-A_DO R & 1 1 UC2_ALARM

181 t 0 314
UC2-A S
& 1
182 1605 UC2-B_DO R 315
UC2-A S t 0
& 1
1606 UC2-C_DO R
0.00 - 300.00s
[UC2EN]
By PLC
+ &
"ON"
1569 UC2_BLOCK 1 &
& In : Rated current

1633 UC2_INST_TP
Figure 2.6.1.2 Undercurrent Protection Scheme Logic
2.6.2 Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the undercurrent protection and their
setting ranges.
UC1 0.5 – 10.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A UC1 threshold setting
(0.10 – 2.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (0.20 A)
TUC1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UC1 definite time setting
UC2 0.5 – 10.0 A 0.1 A 2.0 A UC2 threshold setting
(0.10 – 2.00 A) (0.01 A) (0.40 A)
TUC2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s UC2 definite time setting
[UC1EN] Off / On Off UC1 Enable
[UC2EN] Off / On Off UC2 Enable
(*) Current values shown in parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
 35 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.7 Thermal Overload Protection

The thermal overload feature provides protection for cables and other plant against the effects of
prolonged operation under excess load conditions. A thermal replica algorithm is applied to create
a model for the thermal characteristics of the protected plant. Tripping times depend not only on
the level of overload current, but also on the level of prior load current, the thermal replica
providing ‘memory’ of previous conditions.
The temperature of electrical plant rises according to an I2t function and the thermal overload
protection in GRL150 provides a good protection against damage caused by sustained
overloading. The protection simulates the changing thermal state in the plant using a thermal
model.
The thermal state of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
I2  t 
θ = 1  e    100% (1)
I AOL 
2 
where:
 = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
 = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal state 0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, which is the
point at which no further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be
disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay
gives a trip output when θ= 100%.
The thermal overload protection measures the largest of the three phase currents and operates
according to the characteristics defined in IEC60255-8. (Refer to Appendix A for the
implementation of the thermal model for IEC60255-8.)
Time to trip depends not only on the level of overload, but also on the level of load current prior to
the overload - that is, on whether the overload was applied from ‘cold’ or from ‘hot’.
Independent thresholds for trip and alarm are available.
The characteristic of the thermal overload element is defined by equation (2) and equation (3) for
‘cold’ and ‘hot’. The cold curve is a special case of the hot curve where prior load current Ip is
zero, catering to the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
 I2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2  (2)
 I  I AOL 
 I2  I 2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2P  (3)
 I  I AOL 
where:
t = time to trip for constant overload current I (seconds)
I = overload current (largest phase current) (amps)
IAOL = allowable overload current (amps)
IP = previous load current (amps)
τ= thermal time constant (seconds)
 36 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Ln = natural logarithm
Figure 2.7.1.1 illustrates the IEC60255-8 curves for a range of time constant settings. The
left-hand chart shows the ‘cold’ condition where an overload has been switched onto a previously
un-loaded system. The right-hand chart shows the ‘hot’ condition where an overload is switched
onto a system that has previously been loaded to 90% of its capacity.
Thermal Curves (Cold Curve - Thermal Curves (Hot Curve -

no prior load) 90% prior load)
1000 1000
100
100
Operate Time (minutes)
Operate Time (minutes)

10
10
 1

1 100
100
50 0.1 50
20 20
0.1 10 10
0.01 5
5
2
2
1
0.01 1 0.001
1 10 1 10
Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL) Overload Current (Multiple of
IAOL)
Figure 2.7.1.1 Thermal Curves
2.7.1 Scheme Logic
Figure 2.7.1.2 shows the scheme logic of the thermal overload protection.
The thermal overload element THM has independent thresholds for alarm and trip, and outputs
alarm signal THM ALARM and trip signal THM TRIP. The alarming threshold level is set as a
percentage of the tripping threshold.
The alarming and tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [THMAL] and [THMT]
respectively or binary input signals THMA BLOCK and THM BLOCK.
 37 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
189
THM-A 320
& THM ALARM
&
188
THM-T 321
& THM TRIP
&
[THMAL]
+
"ON"
[THMT]
+
"ON"
1573 THMA_BLOCK 1
1572 THM_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.7.1.2 Thermal Overload Protection Scheme Logic
2.7.2 Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the thermal overload protection and their
setting ranges.
THM 2.0 – 10.0 A 0.1 A 5.0 A Thermal overload setting.
(0.40 – 2.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (1.00 A) (THM = IAOL: allowable overload current)
THMIP 0.0 – 5.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A Previous load current
(0.00 – 1.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (0.00 A)
TTHM 0.5 - 300.0 min 0.1 min 10.0 min Thermal time constant
THMA 50 – 99 % 1% 80 % Thermal alarm setting. (Percentage of THM setting.)
[THMT] Off / On Off Thermal OL enable
[THMAL] Off / On Off Thermal alarm enable
[THMRST Off / On Off Thermal element test
]
(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current
values are in the case of a 5 A rating.
Note: THMIP sets a minimum level of previous load current to be used by the thermal
element, and is only active when testing the element ([THRMST] = “ON”).
 38 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.8 Broken Conductor Protection

The unbalance condition caused by an open circuited conductor is detected by the broken
conductor protection. An unbalance threshold with programmable definite time delay is provided.
Figure 2.8.1.1 shows the sequence network connection diagram in the case of a single-phase series
fault assuming that the positive, negative and zero sequence impedance of the left and right side
system of the fault location is in the ratio of k1 to (1 – k1), k2 to (1 – k2) and k0 to (1 – k0).
E1A
Single-phase series fault
E1B
k1 1– k1
k1Z1 I1F I1F (1-k1)Z1
E1A E1B
Positive phase sequence

k2Z2 I2F I2F (1-k2)Z2
Negative phase sequence

k0Z0 I0F I0F (1-k0)Z0
Zero phase sequence
I1F k2Z2 (1-k2)Z2 I1F

k1Z1 (1-k1)Z1
K0Z0 (1-k0)Z0
E1A E1B
I1F Z2
Z1
Z0
E1A E1B
Figure 2.8.1.1 Equivalent Circuit for a Single-phase Series Fault
Positive phase sequence current I1F, negative phase sequence current I2F and zero phase sequence
current I0F at fault location in an single-phase series fault are given by:
 39 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
I1F + I2F + I0F =0 (1)

Z2FI2F  Z0FI0F = 0 (2)
E1A  E1B = Z1FI1F  Z2FI2F (3)
where,
E1A, E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive sequence impedance
Z2: negative sequence impedance
Z0: zero sequence impedance
From the equations (1), (2) and (3), the following equations are derived.
Z 2 + Z0
I1F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A  E1B)
1 2 1 0 2 0
Z0
I2F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A  E1B)
1 2 1 0 2 0
Z2
I0F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A  E1B)
1 2 1 0 2 0
The magnitude of the fault current depends on the overall system impedance, difference in phase
angle and magnitude between the power source voltages behind both ends.
Broken conductor protection element BCD detects series faults by measuring the ratio of negative
to positive phase sequence currents (I2F / I1F). This ratio is given with negative and zero sequence
impedance of the system:
I2F |I2F| Z0
I1F = |I1F| = Z2 + Z0
The ratio is higher than 0.5 in a system when the zero sequence impedance is larger than the
negative sequence impedance. It will approach 1.0 in a high-impedance earthed or a one-end
earthed system.
The characteristic of BCD element is shown in Figure 2.8.1.2 to obtain the stable operation.
I2
|I2|/|I1|  BCD
setting & BCD
|I1|  0.04In
|I2|  0.01In
0.01In
0 I1
0.04In In: rated current
Figure 2.8.1.2 BCD Element Characteristic
 40 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.8.1 Scheme Logic
Figure 2.8.1.3 shows the scheme logic of the broken conductor protection. BCD element outputs
trip signals BCD TRIP through a delayed pick-up timer TBCD.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switch [BCDEN] or binary input signal BCD BLOCK.
142 TBCD
BCD t 0 322
& BCD TRIP
[BCDEN] 0.00 - 300.00s
+
"ON"
1574 BCD_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.8.1.3 Broken Conductor Protection Scheme Logic
2.8.2 Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the broken conductor protection and
their setting ranges.
BCD 0.10 – 1.00 0.01 0.20 I2 / I1
TBCD 0.00 – 300.00s 0.01s 0.00 s BCD definite time setting
[BCDEN] Off / On Off BCD Enable
Minimum setting of the BC threshold is restricted by the negative phase sequence current
normally present on the system. The ratio I2 / I1 of the system is measured in the relay continuously
and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel, along with the maximum value of
the last 15 minutes I21 max. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage.
The BCD setting should be 130 to 150% of I2 / I1 displayed.
Note: It must be noted that I2 / I1 is displayed only when the positive phase sequence current
(or load current ) in the secondary circuit is larger than 2 % of the rated secondary circuit
current.
 41 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.9 Breaker Failure Protection

Two stage breaker failure protection provides outputs for re-tripping of the local circuit breaker
and/or back-tripping to upstream circuit breakers. The functions can also be initiated by external
protections via a binary input if required.
When fault clearance fails due to a breaker failure, the breaker failure protection (BFP) clears the
fault by back-tripping adjacent circuit breakers.
If the current continues to flow even after a trip command is output, the BFP judges it as a breaker
failure. The existence of the current is detected by an overcurrent element provided for each phase.
For high-speed operation of the BFP, a high-speed reset overcurrent element (less than 20ms) is
used. The element resets when the current falls below 80% of the operating value.
In order to prevent the BFP from starting by accident during maintenance work and testing, and
thus tripping upstream breakers, the BFP has the optional function of re-tripping the local breaker.
To make sure that the breaker has actually failed, a trip command is made to the local breaker
again before tripping the upstream breakers to prevent unnecessary tripping of the upstream
breakers following the erroneous start-up of the BFP. It is possible to choose not to use re-tripping
at all, or use re-tripping with trip command plus delayed pick-up timer, or re-tripping with trip
command plus overcurrent detection plus delayed pick-up timer.
An overcurrent element and delayed pick-up timer are provided for each phase which also operate
correctly during the breaker failure routine in the event of an evolving fault.
2.9.1 Scheme Logic
The BFP is performed on per-phase basis. Figure 2.9.1.1 shows the scheme logic for the BFP. The
BFP is started by the PLC logic per-phase base signals [CBF_INIT-A] to [CBF_INIT-C] or
three-phase base signal [CBF_INIT]. The BFP can be disabled by the PLC logic signal
[CBF_BLOCK]. These signals must continuously exist as long as the fault is present. The BFP can
be disabled by the PLC logic signal [CBF_BLOCK].
The back-tripping signal to the upstream breakers CBF TRIP is output if the overcurrent element
CBF operates continuously for the setting time of the delayed pick-up timer TBTC after initiation.
Tripping of upstream breakers can be blocked with the scheme switch [BTC].
There are two kinds of modes of the re-trip signal to the local breaker CBF RETRIP, the mode in
which re-trip is controlled by the overcurrent element CBF, and the direct trip mode in which
re-trip is not controlled. The re-trip mode together with the trip block can be selected with the
scheme switch [RTC]. In the scheme switch [RTC], “DIR” is the direct trip mode, and “OC” is the
trip mode controlled by the overcurrent element CBF.
Figure 2.9.1.2 shows a sequence diagram for the BFP when a re-trip and backup trip are used. If
the circuit breaker trips normally, the CBF is reset before timer TRTC or TBTC is picked up and
the BFP is reset. As TRTC and TBTC start at the same time, the setting value of TBTC should
include that of TRTC.
If the CBF continues to operate, a re-trip command is given to the local breaker after the setting
time of TRTC. Unless the breaker fails, the CBF is reset by re-trip. TBTC does not time-out and
the BFP is reset. This sequence of events may happen if the BFP is initiated by mistake and
unnecessary tripping of the local breaker is unavoidable.
If the local breaker fails, re-trip has no effect and the CBF continues operating and the TBTC
finally picks up. A trip command CBF TRIP is given to the upstream breakers and the BFP is
completed.
 42 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
[BTC]
+ TBTC
"ON"
124 0 333 332
CBF-A & t
125
1 CBF_TRIP
CBF-B t 0 334
126 &
CBF-C
t 0 335
&
0.00 - 300.00s
TRTC
t 0 329 328
&
1 1 CBF_RETRIP
t 0 330
& 1
t 0 331
& 1
0.00 - 300.00s
1596 CBF_INIT-A
1 &
1597 CBF_INIT-B
1 &
1598 CBF_INIT-C
1 &
348
GEN.TRIP 1599 CBF_INIT
[RTC]
By PLC
+
"OC"
"DIR"
1570 CBF_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.9.1.1 Breaker Failure Protection Scheme Logic
Fault Start CBFP

Adjacent Trip
breakers Closed Open
TRIP
Normal trip Retrip

Original
breakers Closed Open Open
Tcb Tcb
OCBF
Toc Toc
TRTC
TRTC
CBF
RETRIP
TBTC
TBTC
CBF
TRIP
Figure 2.9.1.2 Sequence Diagram
 43 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.9.2 Setting
The setting elements necessary for the breaker failure protection and their setting ranges are as
follows:
CBF 0.5 – 10.0 A 0.1 A 2.5 A Overcurrent setting
(0.10 - 2.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (0.50 A)
TRTC 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s Retrip time setting
TBTC 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Back trip time setting
[RTC] Off / DIR / OC Off Retrip control
[BTC] Off / On Off Back trip control
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other
current values are in the case of 5 A rating.
The overcurrent element CBF checks that the circuit breaker has opened and that the current has
disappeared. Therefore, since it is allowed to respond to load current, it can be set to 10 to 200% of
the rated current.
The settings of TRTC and TBTC are determined by the opening time of the original circuit breaker
(Tcb in Figure 2.9.1.2) and the reset time of the overcurrent element (Toc in Figure 2.9.1.2). The
timer setting example when using retrip can be obtained as follows.
Setting of TRTC = Breaker opening time + CBF reset time + Margin
= 40ms + 10ms + 20ms
= 70ms
Setting of TBTC = TRTC + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time +
CBF reset time + Margin
= 70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms
= 140ms
If retrip is not used, the setting of the TBTC can be the same as the setting of the TRTC.
The actual tripping time after BFP start will be added the time (approx. 15 to 20ms) consumed by
motion of binary input and output to above timer’s settings. (Response time of binary inputs: less
than 8ms, Operating time of binary outputs: less than 10ms)
 44 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.10 Countermeasures for Magnetising Inrush

GRL150 provides the following two schemes to prevent incorrect operation from a magnetising
inrush current during transformer energisation.
- Protection block by inrush current detector
- Cold load protection
2.10.1 Inrush Current Detector
Inrush current detector ICD detects second harmonic inrush current during transformer
energisation and blocks the following protections:
- DIF
- OC1 to OC4
- EF1 to EF4
- SEF1 to SEF4
The ICD is used to protect a line with an in-zone transformer (‘Teed’ transformer) as shown in
Figure 2.10.1.1.
Note: DIFI1 should be set to take account of the transformer load current.
Transformer
GRL150 GRL150
Figure 2.10.1.1 Protection with In-zone Transformer
The blocking can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switches [DIF-ICD] and
[OC-ICD].
The ICD detects the ratio ICD-2f between second harmonic current I2f and fundamental current
I1f in each phase current, and operates if its ratio is larger than the setting value. Figure 2.10.1.2
shows the characteristic of the ICD element and Figure 2.10.1.3 shows the ICD block scheme.
When ICD operates, the local terminal DIF, OC, EF and SEF elements are blocked, and the signal
ICD_BLK-S is sent to the remote terminal for blocking the remote terminal DIF element. The
ICD_BLK-S is assigned to 2051:COM4-S by PLC function. The scheme logic of each element is
shown in the previous sections.
I2f/I1f
|I2f|/|I1f|ICD-2f(%) & ICD
|I1f|ICDOC
ICD-2f(%)
0 ICDOC I1f
Figure 2.10.1.2 ICD Element Characteristic
 45 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
104
A 373 By PLC
105 1 ICD 1683 OC_IC_BLK
ICD
B etc.
106
C
374 By PLC
[DIF-ICD] ICD_BLK-S 2051 COM4-S
&
+ (The signal sent to remote terminal
"BLK" for blocking the remote DIF)
Figure 2.10.1.3 ICD Block Scheme
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the ICD and their setting ranges are as follows:
ICD-2f 10 – 50% 1% 15% Second harmonic detection
ICDOC 0.5 – 25.0 A 0.1 A 0.5 A ICD threshold setting
(0.10 - 2.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (0.10 A)
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values
are in the case of a 5 A rating.
2.10.2 Cold Load Protection
The cold load function modifies the overcurrent protection settings for a period after energising
the system. This feature is used to prevent unwanted protection operation when closing on to the
type of load which takes a high level of current for a period after energisation.
In normal operation, the load current on the distribution line is smaller than the sum of the rated
loads connected to the line. But it amounts to several times the maximum load current for a
moment when all of the loads are energised at once after a long interruption, and decreases to 1.5
times normal peak load after three or four seconds.
To protect those lines with overcurrent element, it is necessary to use settings to discriminate the
inrush current in cold load restoration and the fault current.
2.10.2.1 Scheme Logic

A state transition diagram and its scheme logic are shown in Figure 2.10.2.1 and Figure 2.10.2.2
for the cold load protection. Note that the scheme requires the use of two binary inputs, one each
for CB OPEN and CB CLOSED.
Under normal conditions, where the circuit breaker has been closed for some time, the scheme is in
STATE 0, and the normal default settings group is applied to the overcurrent protection.
If the circuit breaker opens then the scheme moves to STATE 1 and runs the Cold Load Enable
timer TCLE. If the breaker closes again while the timer is running, then STATE 0 is re-entered.
Alternatively, if TCLE expires then the load is considered cold and the scheme moves to STATE
2, and stays there until the breaker closes, upon which it goes to STATE 3.
In STATE 2 and STATE 3, another settings for the cold load protection are applied.
In STATE 3 the Cold Load Reset timer TCLR runs. If the circuit breaker re-opens while the timer
is running then the scheme returns to STATE 2. Alternatively, if TCLR expires then it goes to
STATE 0, the load is considered warm and normal settings can again be applied.
Accelerated reset of the cold load protection is also possible. In STATE 3, the phase currents are
monitored by overcurrent element ICLDO and if all phase currents drop below the ICLDO
threshold for longer than the cold load drop off time (TCLDO) then the scheme automatically
 46 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
reverts to STATE 0. The accelerated reset function can be enabled with the scheme switch
[CLDOEN] setting.
Cold load protection can be disabled by setting [CLEN] to “OFF”.
STATE 0
CB status: Closed
Settings: Normal
Monitor CB status
CB opens CB closes
within
T CLE time
STATE 1
CB status: Open
Settings: Normal
Run T CLE timer

I L<ICLDO for
Monitor CB status T CLR timer T CLDO time
expires
T CLE timer
expires
STATE 3
STATE 2 CB closes CB status: Closed
CB status: Open Settings: Cold Load
Settings: Cold Load
Run T CLR timer
Monitor CB status CB opens Monitor CB status
within Monitor load current IL
CLR time
Figure 2.10.2.1 State Transition Diagram for Cold Load Protection
CB_CLOSE
From Figure 2.2.4.2.
CB_OPEN
Change to
368 &
STATE 0 STATE 1
TCLE
t 0 Change to
369 & 1 STATE 2
STATE 1
0 - 10000s
Change to
&
1 STATE 0
370
STATE 2 Change to
&
STATE 3
371 &
STATE 3
TCLR
& t 0
[CLEN] 0 - 10000s TCLDO
+ 1
"OFF" t 0
&
108 0.00 - 100.00s
ICLDO-A
1 1
109
ICLDO-B
110
ICLDO-A
[CLDOEN]
+
"ON"
Figure 2.10.2.2 Scheme Logic for Cold Load Protection
 47 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.10.2.2 Setting
The setting elements necessary for the cold load protection and their setting ranges are as follows:
ICLDO 0.5 – 10.0 A 0.1 A 2.5 A Cold load drop-off threshold setting
(0.10 - 2.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (0.50 A)
TCLE 0-10000 s 1s 100 s Cold load enable timer
TCLR 0-10000 s 1s 100 s Cold load reset timer
TCLDO 0.00-100.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s Cold load drop-off timer
[CLEN] Off / On Off Cold load protection enable
[CLDOEN] Off / On Off Cold load drop-off enable
DIFI1 0.50  10.00A 0.01A 10.00A Small current region
(0.10  2.00A 0.01A 2.00A)(*1)
DIFI2 1.0  120.0A 0.1A 30.0A Large current region
(0.2  24.0A 0.1A 6.0A)
(0.02 – 5.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (2.00 A)
(0.02 – 5.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (5.00 A)
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (20.00 A)
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (40.00 A)
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (4.00 A)
(0.02 – 5.00 A) (0.01 A) (2.00 A)
(0.02 – 5.00 A) (0.01 A) (5.00 A)
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (20.00 A)
(0.02 – 50.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (40.00 A)
(0.005 – 0.025 A)(*) (0.001 A) (0.020 A)
(0.005 – 0.025 A)(*) (0.001 A) (0.020 A)
(0.005 – 0.025 A)(*) (0.001 A) (0.020 A)
(0.005 – 0.025 A)(*) (0.001 A) (0.020 A)
BCD 0.10 – 1.00 0.01 0.20 I2 / I1
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values
are in the case of a 5 A rating.
 48 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.11 Transfer Trip Function

The GRL150 provides the transfer trip function which receives a trip signal from the remote
terminal and outputs a trip command. Two transfer trip commands are provided. The scheme logic
is shown in Figure 2.11.1. When the scheme switch [TTSW] is set to “TRIP”, the binary output
for tripping is driven. When set to “BO”, the binary output for tripping is not driven and only
user-configurable binary output is driven.
340
1648 TR1-R1 TR1_TRIP
&
341
INTER_TRIP1
&
[TTSW1] "TRIP
+ "BO"
1554 TR1_BLOCK 1
342
1649 TR2-R1 TR2_TRIP
&
343
INTER_TRIP2
&
[TTSW1] "TRIP
+ "BO"
1555 TR2_BLOCK 1
Figure 2.11.1 Transfer Trip Scheme Logic
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the transfer trip function and their setting ranges are as follows:
[TTSW1] Off / Trip / BO Off Transfer trip for CH1
[TTSW2] Off / Trip / BO Off Transfer trip for CH2
 49 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2.12 Trip and Alarm Signal Output

GRL150 provides various trip and alarm signal outputs such as three-phase and single-phase trip
and alarm for each protection. Figures 2.12.1 and 2.12.2 show gathered trip and alarm signals for
each protection.
GRL150 provides 8 auxiliary relays which are composed of two tripping output relays TP1 and
TP2, one auxiliary relay FAIL for relay fail output, and five programmable auxiliary relays BO1
to BO5. BO1 to BO5 can be programmed by setting. (Refer to Section 3.2.3.)
DIF_TRIP
1
TR1_TRIP
TR2_TRIP
OC1_TRIP
360 GEN.TP 348
By PLC
OC2_TRIP 1 GEN.TRIP 2560 TP1
1 1
OC3_TRIP 2561 TP2
EF1_TRIP
PLC 1672 TP_DELAY
EF2_TRIP
EF3_TRIP Reset time delay (default setting: 60ms)
SEF1_TRIP
1
SEF2_TRIP
SEF3_TRIP
UC1_TRIP
1
THM_TRIP
BCD_TRIP
OC4 ALARM
EF4 ALARM 1
353
GEN. ALARM
SEF4 ALARM
UC2 ALARM
THM ALARM
Figure 2.12.1 Three-Phase Output
 50 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
DIF-A_TRIP GEN.TP-A
1 361 349
GEN._TRIP-A
OC1-A_TRIP 1
1
OC2-A_TRIP
OC3-A_TRIP PLC 1664 TP-A_DELAY
UC1-A_TRIP
Reset time delay (default setting: 60ms)
DIF-B_TRIP GEN.TP-B
1 362 350
GEN._TRIP-B
OC1-B_TRIP 1
1
OC2-B_TRIP
OC3-B_TRIP PLC 1665 TP-B_DELAY
UC1-B_TRIP Reset time delay (default setting: 60ms)
DIF-C_TRIP GEN.TP-C
1 363 351
GEN._TRIP-C
OC1-C_TRIP 1
1
OC2-C_TRIP
OC3-C_TRIP PLC 1666 TP-C_DELAY
UC1-C_TRIP
Reset time delay (default setting: 60ms)
EF1_TRIP GEN.TP-N
1 1 364 352
GEN._TRIP-N
EF2_TRIP 1
EF3_TRIP
SEF1_TRIP PLC 1667 TP-N_DELAY
1
SEF2_TRIP Reset time delay (default setting: 60ms)
SEF3_TRIP
OC4-A_ALARM
1 354
GEN. ALARM-A
UC2-A_ALARM
OC4-B_ALARM 1 355
GEN. ALARM-B
UC2-B_ALARM
OC4-C_ALARM 1 356
GEN. ALARM-C
UC2-C_ALARM
EF4_ALARM 1 357
GEN. ALARM-N
SEF4_ALARM
Figure 2.12.2 Single-Phase Output
 51 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
3. Technical Description
3.1 Hardware Description
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules
The case outline of GRL150 is shown in Appendix E.

The hardware structure of GRL150 is shown in Figure 3.1.1.1.
The GRL150 relay unit consists of the following hardware modules. These modules are fixed in a
frame and cannot be taken off individually. The human machine interface module is provided with
the front panel.
 Power module (POWD)
 Signal processing module (SPMP)
 Human machine interface module (HMI)
The hardware block diagram of GRL150 is shown in Figure 3.1.1.2.
SPMP
POWD
HMI
IN SERVICE VIEW
TRIP
ALARM
RESET
A B 0V
CAN
CEL ENTER
Handle for relay
END
withdrawal
Figure 3.1.1.1 Hardware Structure without Case
 52 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
SPMP Pilot wire

POWD 5kV
DC insulation communication
supply DC/DC
Converter
P/S E/O Fibre optic
S/P O/E communication
Binary Photo-coupler
input 8
Binary output
AC input Auxiliary relay (Trip x 2
CT  4 Analogue Multi- A/D 8
I filter plexer converter MPU Alarm x 5
(Max) Fail x 1)
RS485
Transceiver(CH1) Relay
setting and
RAM ROM RS485 monitoring
Transceiver(CH2) system
or or
Fibre Optic I/F IEC60870-5
-103
Human machine
Interface (HMI)
Liquid crystal display

16 characters  2 lines
LEDs Operation keys
Local
personal RS232C Monitoring
computer I/F jacks
Figure 3.1.1.2 Hardware Block Diagram
POWD Module
The POWD module insulates between the internal and external circuits through an auxiliary
transformer and transforms the magnitude of AC input signals to suit the electronic circuits. The
AC input signals may be one to three phase currents and a residual current depending on the relay
model.
This module incorporates max. 4 auxiliary CTs, DC/DC converter and 8 photo-coupler circuits for
binary input signals.
The available input voltage ratings of the DC/DC converter are, 24V, 48V, 110V/125V or
220/250V. The normal range of input voltage is 20% to 20%.
SPMP Module
The SPMP module consists of analogue filter, multiplexer, analogue to digital (A/D) converter,
main processing unit (MPU), random access memory (RAM) and read only memory (ROM) and
executes all kinds of processing such as protection, measurement, recording and display, and also
executes communication control processing of local and received data, memories (RAM and
ROM), parallel-to-serial and serial-to-parallel data converter, and electrical-to-optical and
optical-to-electrical converter.
The analogue filter performs low-pass filtering for the corresponding current signals.
The A/D converter has a resolution of 12 bits and samples input signals at sampling frequencies of
2400 Hz (at 50 Hz) and 2880 Hz (at 60 Hz).
 53 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
The MPU implements more than 240 MIPS and uses a RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computer)
type 32-bit microprocessor.
The SPMP module also incorporates 2 auxiliary relays TP1 and TP2 for tripping, 6 auxiliary
relays (BO1-BO5 and FAIL) for binary output signals and an RS485 transceiver.
TP1 and TP2 have two normally open contacts.
BO1 to BO4 are user configurable output signals and each has one normally open contact. BO5 is
also a user-configurable output signal and has one normally open and one normally closed contact.
The auxiliary relay FAIL has one normally open and one normally closed contacts, and operates
when a relay failure or abnormality in the DC circuit is detected.
The RS485 transceiver is used for the link with the relay setting and monitoring (RSM) system or
IEC60870-5-103 communication. The external signal is isolated from the relay’s internal circuits.
Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module

The operator can access the GRL150 via the human machine interface (HMI) module. As shown
in Figure 3.1.1.3, the HMI panel has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED),
view and reset keys, operation keys, monitoring jacks and an RS232C connector on the front
panel.
The LCD consists of 16 columns by 2 rows with a back-light and displays recording, status and
setting data.
There are a total of 6 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in “Test” menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Red Lit when a failure is detected.
(LED1) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when relay operates.
LED1, LED2 and LED3 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be
programmed for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset
characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. For the setting, see
Section 4.2.6.10. For the operation, see Section 4.2.1.
The VIEW key starts the LCD indication and switches between windows. The RESET key
clears the LCD indication and turns off the LCD back-light.
The operation keys are used to display the record, status and setting data on the LCD, input the
settings or change the settings.
The monitoring jacks and two pairs of LEDs, A and B, on top of the jacks can be used while the
test mode is selected in the LCD window. Signals can be displayed on LED A or LED B by
selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and setting it in the window and the
signals can be transmitted to an oscilloscope via the monitoring jacks. (For the "Signal List", see
Appendix B.)
The RS232C connector is a 9-pin D-subminiature connector for serial RS232C connection. This
connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.
 54 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Screw for cover
Liquid crystal
display
IN SERVICE VIEW
TRIP
Light emitting ALARM
diodes (LED)
RESET
Operation keys
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
A B 0V CAN
Monitoring Jacks CEL ENTER
RS232C connector END
To a local PC
Screw for handle Screw for cover
Figure 3.1.1.3 Front Panel
 55 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
3.2 Input and Output Signals

3.2.1 AC Input Signals
Table 3.2.1.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRL150 model and their respective
input terminal numbers.
Table 3.2.1.1 AC Input Signals
Term. No. Model

of TB1 100, 400 110, 410 120, 420
1-2 A phase current A phase current A phase current
3-4 B phase current B phase current B phase current
5-6 C phase current C phase current C phase current
--- Residual current Zero sequence

7-8 (E) current (SE)
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals
The GRL150 provides eight programmable binary input circuits. Each binary input circuit is
programmable by PLC function, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion.
The binary input circuit of the GRL150 is provided with a logic level inversion function and a
pick-up and drop-off delay timer function as shown in Figure 3.2.2.1. Each input circuit has a
binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or inverted operation. This allows
the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed contacts. Where the driving
contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to “Norm” (normal). If not, then
“Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay times can be set 0.0 to 300.00s
respectively.
Logic level inversion function, and pick-up and drop-off delay timer settings are as follows:
Element Contents Range Step Default
BI1SNS - BI8SNS Binary switch Norm/ Inv Norm
BI1PUD - BI8PUD Delayed pick-up timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
BI1DOD - BI8DOD Delayed drop-off timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
The operating voltage of binary input signal is typical 74V DC at 110V/125V DC rating and 138V
DC at 220/250V DC. The minimum operating voltage is 70V DC at 110/125V DC rating and
125V DC at 220/250V DC.
The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between four settings groups. Change of
active setting group is performed by PLC (Signal No. 2640 to 2643).
Four alarm messages (Alarm1 to Alarm4) can be set. The user can define a text message within 16
characters for each alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI8 by setting.
Then when inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.
These alarm output signals are signal Nos. 2652 to 2655.
 56 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
GRL150
(+) () BI1PUD BI1DOD [BI1SNS]
BI1 1284 t 0 0 t 512 528
BI1
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI2PUD BI2DOD [BI2SNS]
BI2 1285 t 0 0 t 513 529
BI2
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI8PUD BI8DOD [BI8SNS]

BI8 1291 t 0 0 t 519 535
BI8
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
0V
Figure 3.2.2.1 Logic Level Inversion
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals
The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix F. All
outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.
GRL150 provides 8 auxiliary relays which is composed of two tripping output relay TP1 and TP2,
one auxiliary relay FAIL for relay fail output and five programmable auxiliary relays BO1 to BO5.
TP1 and TP2 can be programmed by PLC function. BO1 to BO5 can be programmed by setting.
The reset time of the tripping output relay following fault clearance can be programmed by PLC
function. The setting is respective for each output relay.
For example, when the “GEN.TRIP” signal of the protection is linked to the binary output
auxiliary relay TP1, the PLC logic is assigned to the signal No. 348 of GEN.TRIP for PLC input
and the signal No. 2560 of TP1 for PLC output as shown in Figure 3.2.3.1 by the PLC tool. For the
PLC tool, refer to PLC tool instruction manual.
In the case of the tripping output relay, it must be checked that the tripping circuit is opened with
a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay resetting, in order to prevent
the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breaker tripping coil current.
GRL150
PLC input PLC output Auxiliary relay
Protection
functions 348 PLC logic 2560 TP1
GEN.TRIP TP1
For
tripping
2561 TP2
TP2
Figure 3.2.3.1 Binary Output Circuit
 57 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relays BO1 to
BO5 individually or in arbitrary combinations. Signals can be combined using either an AND
circuit or OR circuit with 4 gates each as shown in Figure 3.2.3.2. The output circuit can be
configured according to the setting menu. Appendix C shows the factory default settings.
Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off
“Ins”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Lat” by the
scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can be
set by TBO.
When the relay is latched, it can be reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary
input. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
Signal List
& Auxiliary relay

4 GATES
Appendix B
or 1
1
4 GATES
&
TBO
0 t
&
[RESET] "Dw" 0.00 – 10.00s
+ "Dl"
& S
F/F
"Lat"
R
Reset button
+
1
By PLC
535 BI8-COM-T 1551 IND.RESET
Figure 3.2.3.2 Configurable Output
The relay failure contact (FAIL) closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply
circuit is detected.
 58 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function
GRL150 is provided with a PLC function allowing user-configurable sequence logics on binary
signals. The sequence logics with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, XOR, NOT logics, etc. can be
produced by using the PC software “PLC tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay
elements or binary circuits.
Configurable binary inputs and binary outputs, and the initiation trigger of fault record and
disturbance record are programmed by the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for
complicated logics or for using a user-configured signal in many logic sequences.
PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC tool. For PLC tool, refer to PLC tool
instruction manual.
Figure 3.2.4.1 Sample Screen of PLC Tool
 59 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
3.3 Automatic Supervision

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision
Though the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it waits for a
power system fault to occur at any time, and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the
automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal
operation, plays an important role. The GRL150 implements an automatic supervision function,
based on the following concepts:
 The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.
 Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
 When a failure occurs, it is recorded as Alarm record, the user should be able to easily identify
the location of the failure.
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring

The relay is supervised by the following functions.
AC input imbalance monitoring

The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health
of the AC input circuit is checked.
 CT circuit current monitoring
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|)  4  Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|)  k0
where,
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Maximum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Minimum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0 = 20% of rated current
The CT circuit current monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures that have occurred
in the AC input circuit. This monitoring can be disabled by the scheme switch [CTSVEN].
A/D accuracy checking

An analog reference voltage is input to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range, and
that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Memory monitoring
Memory is monitored as follows, depending on the type of memory, and checks are done to verify
that memory circuits are healthy:
 Random access memory monitoring:
Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.
 Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.
 Setting value monitoring: Checks discrepancies between the setting values stored in
duplicate.
Watchdog Timer
A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the software is provided, which checks that the
 60 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
software is running normally.
DC Supply Monitoring
The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored, and is checked to see
that the DC voltage is within a prescribed range.
The alarms are issued when the failure continues for a predetermined time. The times for each
monitoring item are as follows;
 A/D accuracy checking, memory monitoring, Watch Dog Timer, DC supply monitoring:
less than 1s
 AC input imbalance monitoring, sampling synchronization monitoring : 15s
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by a binary input. Figure 3.3.3.1
shows a typical scheme. A binary input BIn is assigned to No.1548:TCSV signal by PLC. When
the trip circuit is complete, a small current flows through the binary input and the trip circuit. Then
logic signal of the binary input circuit BIn is "1".
If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes an open circuit, then the binary input resets and
the BIn output is "0". A trip circuit fail alarm T_FAIL is output when the BIn output is "0".
If the trip circuit failure is detected, then “ALARM” LED is lit and “Err: TC” is displayed in LCD
message.
The monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON". When
"OPT-ON" is selected, the monitoring is enabled only while CB is closed.
(+) Trip circuit supervision
BIn
By PLC
Trip t 0 1359
BIn command 1548 TCSV 1 & TC_FAIL
output
0.4s
CB CLOSE
& 1
"OPT-ON"
[TCSPEN]
+ "ON"
CB trip coil
Figure 3.3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme Logic
3.3.4 Differential Current (Id) Monitoring
The DIFSV element is provided to detect any erroneous differential current appearing as a result
of CT circuit failure. The tripping output signal of the DIF elements can be blocked when the
DIFSV element output is maintained for the setting time of TIDSV. To block the tripping output
with DIFSV operation, set scheme switch IDSVEN to “ALM&BLK”. To alarm only, set to
“ALM”.
3.3.5 Telecommunication Channel Monitoring
The telecommunication channel is monitored at each terminal by employing a cyclic redundancy

check of the received data. The check is carried out for every sample.
If a communication failure is detected continuously for ten seconds at a terminal, a communication
failure alarm "Com fail" is issued at the terminal.
 61 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
GRL150 provides the function to check the frequency of communication failures. The function
has FERALM, FERAEN and CF-PER settings, and FER, CF and CF-L counts are displayed as a
result of the checking. The function is maily used to check a quality of the pilot wire
communication route. If the FER (Frame Error Rate) exceeds the FERALM setting value, the
FER_ALM alarm signal is output. The FER is calculated by the following equation:
FER: Frame Error Rate
FER = {CF-L / (The number of received frame for CF-PER period)}  100 (%)
CF: counts the number of communication failure occurrence for every sampling time.
CF-L: records and displays the number of communication failure occurrence for CF-PER
setting.
The CF-L is used when the failure is out of count. (See Section 4.2.3.4 and 4.2.6.5.)
CF-PER: period time setting for counting up the communication failure.
The FER can be disabled by the scheme switch [FERAEN].
1374
FER  “FERALM” FER_ALM
setting value &
[FERAEN]
"ON"
+
Figure 3.3.5.1 Frame Error Rate Alarm
3.3.6 Disconnector Monitoring
The disconnector is monitored because the disconnector contact signal is used for the
out-of-service terminal detection.
To monitor the disconnector, one pair of normally open contact and normally closed contact is
introduced. Disconnector failure is detected when both contacts are simultaneously in the open or
closed state for the prescribed period.
The monitoring is blocked by setting the scheme switch [DSSMEN] to OFF. The default setting of
[DSSMEN] is OFF to prevent a false failure detection when the disconnector contacts are not
introduced.
3.3.7 Circuit Breaker Monitoring
The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring

Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the health of circuit breaker (CB). If two
binary inputs are programmed to the functions ‘CB_N/O_CONT’ and ‘CB_N/C_CONT’, then the
CB state monitoring function becomes active. In normal circumstances these inputs are in opposite
states. Figure 3.3.7.1 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state during five seconds,
then a CB state alarm CBSV operates and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed in LCD message
and event record message respectively.
The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].
 62 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
t 0
528 BI1-COM-T 1536 CB_N/O_CONT 1 CBSV
=1 &
By PLC
5.0s
529 BI2-COM-T 1537 CB_N/C_CONT

By PLC
[CBSMEN]
"ON"
+
Figure 3.3.7.1 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic
Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and
BIn respectively, and functions of BIm and BIn are assigned to “CB_N/O_CONT” and
“CB_N/C_CONT” by PLC.
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring

Periodic maintenance of CB is required for checking of the trip circuit, the operation mechanism
and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a number of
fault current interruptions.
The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine the time for
maintenance of CB:
 Trip is counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operation mechanism. The trip
counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued and
informs user of time for maintenance when the count exceeds a user-defined setting TCALM.
The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].
 Sum of the broken current quantity Iy is counted for monitoring the interrupting capability of
CB. The Iy counter increments the value of current to the power ‘y’, recorded at the time of
issue of the tripping signal, on a phase by phase basis. For oil circuit breakers, the dielectric
withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of I2t, and maintenance such as oil
changes, etc., may be required. ‘I’ is the fault current broken by CB. ‘t’ is the arcing time
within the interrupter tank and it cannot be determined accurately. Therefore, ‘y’ is normally
set to 2 to monitor the broken current squared. For other circuit breaker types, especially those
for HV systems, ‘y’ may be set lower, typically 1.0. An alarm is issued when the count for any
phase exceeds a user-defined setting IyALM. The Iy count alarm can be enabled or disabled
by setting the scheme switch [IyAEN].
 Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks CB
operating time and the need for mechanism maintenance is informed if the CB operation is
slow. The operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the
phase currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phase
exceeds a user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specified
interrupting time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the
scheme switch [OPTAEN].
The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.
The CB condition monitoring functions are triggered each time a trip is issued, and they can also
be triggered by an external device via binary inputs assigned to No.1588:EXT_TRIP-A,
No.1589:EXT_TRIP-B, No.1590:EXT_TRIP-C and No.1591:EXT_TRIP by PLC as shown in
Figure 3.3.7.2.
 63 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
(+) () External trip GRL150 Binary input setting

A-phase
BIa command 1588 EXT_TRIP-A
BIa
By PLC
External trip
B-phase
BIb command 1589 EXT_TRIP-B
BIb
By PLC
Figure 3.3.7.2 Binary Input Setting for CB Condition Monitoring
3.3.8 Failure Alarms
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items and
alarms.
The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automatically
when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing the VIEW key. The event record messages are
shown on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.
The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.
The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The setting
is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.
When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and
event recording of the failure may not function normally.
Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms
Supervision Item LCD Message LED LED External Alarm record Message
"IN SERVICE" "ALARM" alarm
AC input imbalance monitoring Err:CT On/Off (2) On (4) Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2)
A/D accuracy check Err:A/D Off On (4) Relay fail
Err:SUM, Err:RAM,
Memory monitoring Off On (4) Relay fail
Err:BRAM, Err:EEP
Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (4) ----
DC supply monitoring Err:DC Off (3) Off Relay fail-A
Telecommunication monitoring Err:COM on on (5) Com. fail
Sampling Synchronization
Err:SYN on on (4) Sync. fail
monitoring
Ready signal monitoring Err:RDY on on (5) Term. rdy off
Disconnector monitoring Err:DS on on (5) DS fail
Id monitoring Err:Id on/off (6) On (5) Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2)
Trip circuit supervision Err:TC On On Off Relay fail-A
CB state monitoring Err:CB On On Off Relay fail-A
CB operating time monitoring ALM:OP time On On Off Relay fail-A
Trip count alarm ALM:TP COUNT On On Off Relay fail-A
Iy count alarm ALM:IY On On Off Relay fail-A
(1): Diverse messages are provided as expressed with "Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [CTSVEN] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &
 64 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.6). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch
[CTSVEN] is set to "ALM".
(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.
(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates.
(5): The user-configurable binary output relays operate if assigned.
(6): The LED is on when the scheme switch [IDSVEN] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &
BLK".
The relationship between the LCD message and the location of the failure is shown in Table 6.7.1
in Section 6.7.2.
3.3.9 Trip Blocking
When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long
as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.
 A/D accuracy check
 Memory monitoring
 Watchdog Timer
 Telecommunication channel monitoring
When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring and Id monitoring, the scheme
switch [CTSVEN] setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is
output, or if only an alarm is output.
3.3.10 Setting
The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the
table below.
[CTSVEN] OFF/ALM&BLK/ALM ALM&BLK Alarming and blocking or alarming only
[IDSVEN] OFF/ALM&BLK/ALM ALM&BLK Alarming and blocking or alarming only
[TCSPEN] OFF/ON/OPT-ON OFF Trip circuit supervision
[CBSMEN] OFF/ON OFF CB state monitoring
[TCAEN] OFF/ON OFF Trip count alarm
[IyAEN] OFF/ON OFF Iy count alarm
[OPTAEN] OFF/ON OFF Operate time alarm
[FERAEN] OFF/ON OFF Frame error rate alarm
DIFSV 50 – 100 % 1% 50 % DIFSV threshold setting (% of DIF setting)
TIDSV 0 – 60 s 1s 10 s DIFSV timer
TCALM 1 - 10000 1 10000 Trip count alarm threshold setting
IyALM 10 – 10000 E6 E6 10000 Iy alarm threshold setting
YVALUE 1.0 – 2.0 0.1 2.0 y value setting
OPTALM 100 – 5000 ms 10 ms 1000 ms Operate time alarm threshold setting
CF-PER 1 – 60 1s 10 s CF period threshold
FERALM 0.0 – 50.0 0.1 % 20.0 % Frame error rate alarm level
The scheme switch [CTSVEN] is set in the "Application" sub-menu. Other scheme switches are
set in the "Scheme sw" sub-menu.
 65 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
3.4 Recording Function

The GRL150 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.
3.4.1 Fault Recording
Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRL150 and the following items are
recorded for one fault:
Date and time
Trip mode
Operating phase
Power system quantities
User configurable initiation
User can configure four fault record triggers (Signal No.:2624 to 2627) by PLC. Any of input
signals as shown in Appendix B is assigned to these fault record trigger signals.
Up to the 8 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 8 faults have
been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.
Date and time occurrence

This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated. The time resolution is 1 ms using
the relay internal clock.
Trip mode
This shows the protection scheme that output the tripping command.
Operating phase
This is the phase to which an operating command is output.
Power system quantities

The following power system quantities in pre-faults and post-faults are recorded.
- Magnitude and phase angle of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
- Magnitude and phase angle of residual current (Ie)(*)
- Magnitude and phase angle of positive, negative and zero sequence currents (I1, I2, I0)
- The ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1)
- Magnitude of and phase angle phase current at remote terminal (IaR, IbR, IcR)
- Magnitude of phase differential current (Ida, Idb, Idc)
- Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)

Note (*): The displayed power system quantity Ie depends on relay model. Ie is not displayed in
 66 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
models 100 and 400, is a residual current for EF in models 110 and 410, and is a current for SEF
fed from core balance CT in models 120 and 420.
Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence current at local terminal) as a
reference phase angle.
3.4.2 Event Recording
The events shown are recorded with a 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status changes. The user
can set a maximum of 128 recording items, and their status change mode. The event items can be
assigned to a signal number in the signal list. The status change mode is set to “On” (only
recording On transitions) or “On/Off”(recording both On and Off transitions) mode by setting.
The “On/Off” mode events are specified by “Bi-trigger events” setting. If the “Bi-trigger events”
is set to “100”, No.1 to 100 events are “On/Off” mode and No.101 to 128 events are “On” mode.
The name of an event can be set by RSM100. Maximum 22 characters can be set, but the LCD
displays only 11 characters. Therefore, it is recommended the maximum 11 characters are set. The
set name can be viewed on the Set.(view) screen.
The elements necessary for event recording and their setting ranges are shown in the table below.
The default setting of event record is shown in Appendix G.
BITRN 0 - 128 1 100 Number of bi-trigger(on/off) events
EV1 – EV128 0 - 3071 Assign the signal number
Up to 480 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 480 records have been stored,
the oldest event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored.
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
Disturbance recording is started when the overcurrent starter element operates or a tripping
command is initiated. Further, disturbance recording is started when a start command by PLC is
initiated. User can configure four disturbance record triggers (Signal No.:2632 to 2635) by PLC.
The records include four local analogue data (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ie), three local analogue data (IaL, IbL,
IcL) sent to remote terminal, three remote analogue data (IaR, IbR, IcR) sent from remote
terminal, 32 binary signals and the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal
shown in Appendix B can be assigned by the binary signal setting of disturbance record.
Note: The current data IaR, IbR, IcR is for reference. If the detail of remote current data is required,
the local current data stored at the remote terminal relay should be checked.
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software
instruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time is fixed at 0.3s and post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1
and 3.0s.
The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate
relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in
Table 3.4.2.
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.
 67 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Recording time 0.1s 0.5s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 2.5s 3.0s

50Hz 40 25 15 10 9 7 6
60Hz 40 20 10 9 7 6 5
Settings
The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown
in the table below.
OC 0.5-250.0 A 0.1 A 10.0 A Overcurrent detection
(0.10-50.00 A 0.01 A 2.00 A) (*)
EF 0.5-250.0 A 0.1 A 3.0 A Earth fault detection
(0.10-50.00 A 0.01 A 0.60A)
SEF 0.01-1.00 A 0.01 A 1.00 A Sensitive earth fault detection
(0.002-0.200 A 0.001 A 0.200 A)
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are for the case of a 1A rating. Other current values are
for the case of a 5A rating.
Starting the disturbance recording by a tripping command or the starter element listed above is
enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.

[Trip] OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command
[OC] OFF/ON ON Start by OC operation
[EF] OFF/ON ON Start by EF operation
[SEF] OFF/ON ON Start by SEF operation
 68 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
3.5 Metering Function

The GRL150 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The
measurement data shown below is renewed every second and displayed on the LCD of the relay
front panel or on the local or remote PC.
- Magnitude of and phase angle phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
- Magnitude of and phase angle residual current (Ie)(*)
- Magnitude of and phase angle positive, negative and zero sequence currents (I1, I2, I0)
- The ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1)
- Magnitude of and phase angle phase current at remote terminal (IaR, IbR, IcR)
- Magnitude of phase differential current (Ida, Idb, Idc)
- Magnitude of phase restraint current (Ira, Irb, Irc)
- Magnitude of pickup current (Ipua, Ipub, Ipuc)
- Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)

- Maximum phase current (Iamax, Ibmax, Icmax)
- Maximum residual current (Iemax) (*)
- Maximum negative and zero sequence currents (I2max, I0max)
- Maximum ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I21 max)
Note (*): The displayed power system quantity Ie depends on relay model. The Ie is not displayed in
model 100 and 400, is a residual current for EF in model 110 and 410, and is a current for SEF
fed from core balance CT.
Phase angles above are expressed taking that of positive sequence current at the local terminal as
a reference phase angle, where leading phase angles are expressed as positive, (+).
The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side
as determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio as well.
For the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in
4.2.6.7. In the case of the maximum value displays above, the measured quantity is averaged
over a rolling 15 minute time window, and the maximum recorded average value is shown on the
display screen.
 69 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
4. User Interface
4.1 Outline of User Interface
The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using a personal computer (PC) via an
RS232C port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting
and Monitoring) or IEC60870-5-103 communication via RS485 port.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree
of the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).
4.1.1 Front Panel
As shown in Figure 3.1.3, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and RS-232C connector.
LCD
The LCD screen, provided with a 2-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user
with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing the VIEW key will display the digest screen and pressing any key other than VIEW
and RESET will display the menu screen.
These screens are turned off by pressing the RESET key or END key. If any display is left for
5 minutes or longer without operation, the back-light will go off.
LED
There are 6 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Red Lit when a failure is detected.
(LED1) Yellow Configurable LED to assign signals with or without latch when
relay operates.
relay operates.
relay operates.
The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command
goes off. For the operation, see Section 4.2.1.
Operation keys
The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to
input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:
 , , , : Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter numerical
values and text strings.
 70 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.
 END : Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off
the display.
 ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.
VIEW and RESET keys
Pressing VIEW key displays digest screens such as "Metering", "Latest fault",
"Auto-supervision", "Alarm display" and "Indication".
Pressing RESET key turns off the display.
Monitoring jacks
The two monitoring jacks A and B and their respective LEDs can be used when the test mode is
selected on the LCD screen. By selecting the signal to be observed from the "Signal List" and
setting it on the screen, the signal can be displayed on LED A or LED B, or transmitted to an
oscilloscope via a monitoring jack.
RS232C connector
The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection with a local
personal computer.
 71 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
4.1.2 Communication Ports
The following interfaces are provided as communication ports:

 RS232C port
 RS485 port or optional fibre optic port
 IRIG-B port (provided for model 4 series only)
 Interface port for telecommunication system
RS232C port
This connector is a standard 9-way D-type connector for serial port RS232C transmission and is
mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer to this connector, setting and
display functions can be performed from the personal computer.
RS485 port or optional fibre optic port

One or two serial communication ports can be provided. In the single-port type, it is connected to
the RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring system) via the protocol converter G1PR2 or
IEC60870-5-103 communication via BCU/RTU (Bay Control Unit / Remote Terminal Unit) to
connect between relays and to construct a network communication system. (See Figure 4.4.1 in
Section 4.4.)
In the case of the two-port type, one port can be used for the relay setting and monitoring (RSM)
system or IEC60870-5-103 communication, while the other port is used for IEC60870-5-103
communication only.
Screw terminals for RS485 or ST connectors for fibre optic interface (option) are provided on the
back of the relay.
IRIG-B port
The IRIG-B port collects serial IRIG-B format data from the external clock to synchronize the
relay calendar clock. The IRIG-B port is isolated from the external circuit by a photo-coupler.
This port is on the back of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.2.1.
Interface port for telecommunication system

The pilot wire and/or fibre optic port for telecommunication system is provided on the back of
the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.2.1. In the case of fibre optic port, LC connector is provided.
 72 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
TB4
TB3
TB1
TB2
RX()
TX()
Note (): TX and RX are provided

only for model 400 series.
(a) Rear view for Dual RS485 model
OPT1
TX RX
TB3
TB1
TB2
RX()
TX()
Note (): TX and RX are provided only

for model 400 series.
(b) Rear view for Fibre optic model
Terminal Application
TB3: A1 – A3 RS485 I/F (CH1) for RSM
TB4 RS485 I/F (CH2) for IEC 60870-5-103
OPT1 Fibre optic for IEC 60870-5-103
Figure 4.1.2.1 Location of Communication Port
 73 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
4.2 Operation of the User Interface

The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the
LCD display and operation keys.
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays
Displays during normal operation

Indication
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ]
Metering 1
I a   .   k A
Metering 2
I b   .   k A
Metering 3
I c   .   k A
Metering 4
I e   .   k A Available for models 110 and 410.
Metering 5
I s e     .  A Available for models 120 and 420.
Metering 6
I a R    .   k A
   .  
Metering 7
I b R    .   k A
   .  
Metering 8
I c R    .   k A
   .  
Metering 9
I d a    .   k V
   .  
Metering 10
I d b    .   k V
   .  
Metering 11
I d c    .   k V
   .  
 74 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
When the GRL150 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is
off.
Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off, the LCD will display the "Indication", "Metering1",
"Metering2", "Metering3", "Metering4", "Metering5", ……, "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision"
and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. The last three screens are displayed only when there is
some data. These are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LCD.

For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
Indication
This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ]
Status of element,
Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)
Displays in tripping
Latest fault
P h a s e A B C : Faulted phases
O C 1 : Tripping element
If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED and
other configurable LED if signals assigned to trigger by tripping
Press the VIEW key to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of messages.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED3) are assigned to latch signals by trigger of
tripping, press the RESET key more than 3s until the LCD screens relight. Confirm turning
off the configurable LEDs. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 1.
2) Then, press the RESET key again on the "Latest fault" screen in short period, confirm
turning off the "TRIP" LED. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 2.
3) When only the "TRIP" LED is go off by pressing the RESET key in short period, press the
RESET key again to reset remained LEDs in the manner 1) on the "Latest fault" screen or
other digest screens. LED1 through LED3 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still
active state.
 75 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Table 4.2.1 Turning off latch LED operation
LED lighting status

Operation "TRIP" LED Configurable LED
(LED1 – LED3)
Step 1 Press the RESET key more than 3s on
the "Latest fault" screen
continue to lit turn off
Step 2 Then, press the RESET key in short

period on the "Latest fault" screen
turn off
When any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function.
To return from menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:
 Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
 Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Press the VIEW key to display the digest "Latest fault" screen.
Displays in automatic supervision operation
Auto-supervision
E r r : R OM , A / D
If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the
"Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and
the "ALARM" LED lights.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and
"Latest fault" screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display. However, if the failure continues,
the "ALARM" LED remains lit.
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected while any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed
and the "ALARM" LED lights.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED3) are assigned to latch signals by issuing an
alarm, press the RESET key more than 3s until all LEDs reset except "IN SERVICE" LED.
 76 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2) When configurable LED is still lit by pressing RESET key in short period, press RESET
key again to reset remained LED in the above manner.
3) LED1 through LED3 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active state.
While any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To
return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
 Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
 Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Press the VIEW key to display the digest screen.
 Press the RESET key to turn off the LCD.
Alarm Display
Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)
             
        : A L M 1
The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by user. (For setting,
see Section 4.2.6.8)
These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.
 77 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
4.2.2 Relay Menu
Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRL150. The menu has five sub-menus, "Record",
"Status", "Set.(view)", "Set.(change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see
Appendix D.
Menu Record F. record

E. record
D. record
Counter
Status Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
Set. (view) Version

Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Set. (change) Password

Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Test Switch
Binary O/P
Logic circuit
Sim. fault
Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu
 78 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault records event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip
count.
Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI, RSM or IEC60870-5-103),
clock adjustment and LCD contrast.
Set. (view)
The "Set.(view)" menu displays the relay version, description, relay address and baud rate in RSM
or IEC60870-5-103 communication, the current settings of record, status, protection, binary
inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Set. (change)
The "Set.(change)" menu is used to change the settings of password, description, relay address and
baud rate in RSM or IEC60870-5-103 communication, record, status, protection, binary inputs,
configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has
password security protection.
Test
The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.
The "Test" menu also has password security protection.
When the LCD is off, press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys to display the top
"MENU" screen and then proceed to the relay menus.
M E N U
 R e c o r d
 S t a t u s
 S e t . ( v i e w )
 S e t . ( c h a n g e )
 T e s t
To display the "MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the RESET key to turn
off the LCD, then press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer.
The last item is not displayed for all the screens. " " or " " displayed on the far right shows that
lower or upper lines exist.
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the
window, use the and keys.
/ 5 T r i p
 S c h e m e s w
 P r o t . e l e m e n t
 79 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix
D, press the END key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then
move to the lower screen.
4.2.3 Displaying Records
The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and
counts such as trip count and ΣIy count.
4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records

To display fault records, do the following:
 Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.

/ 1 R e c o r d
 F . r e c o r d
 E . r e c o r d
 D . r e c o r d
 C o u n t e r
 Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.

/ 2 F . r e c o r d
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r
 Select "Display" to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the top
in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 F . r e c o r d
# 1 1 6 / J u l / 2 0 0 1
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 0 3 1
# 2 2 0 / M a y / 2 0 0 1
1 5 : 2 9 : 2 2 . 1 0 1
# 3 0 4 / F e b / 2 0 0 1
1 1 : 5 4 : 5 3 . 2 9 9
# 4 2 8 / J a n / 2 0 0 1
0 7 : 3 0 : 1 8 . 4 1 2
 Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the and keys and press the
ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.
/ 4 F . r e c o r d # 1
0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 2 Date
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 0 3 1 Time
D I F Trip element
P h a s e A B C Faulted phase
P r e f a u l t v a l u e s
I a   .   k A
 80 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
   .  
I b   .   k A
   .  
I c   .   k A
   .  
I e   .   k A Available for model 110 and 410.
   .  
I e     .  A Available for model 120 and 420.
   .  
I 1   .   k A
   .  
I 2   .   k A
   .  
I 0   .   k A
   .  
I 2 / I 1   .  
I a R   .   k A
   .  
I b R   .   k A
   .  
I c R   .   k A
   .  
I d a   .   k A
I d b   .   k A
I d c   .   k A
F a u l t v a l u e s
I a   .   k A
   .  
I b   .   k A
   .  
I c   .   k A
   .  
   .  
   .  
I 1   .   k A
   .  
I 2   .   k A
   .  
I 0   .   k A
   .  
I 2 / I 1   .  
I a R   .   k A
   .  
I b R   .   k A
   .  
I c R   .   k A
   .  
I d a   .   k A
I d b   .   k A
I d c   .   k A
T H M    .  %
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and keys.
To clear all the fault records, do the following:
 81 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 Open the "Record" sub-menu.

 Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.
 Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r r e c o r d s ?
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not
displayed.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, Press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.
4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display event records, do the following:

 Select "E. record" to display the "E. record" screen.
/ 2 E . r e c o r d
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r
 Select "Display" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 E . r e c o r d
2 1 / S e p / 2 0 0 2 4 8 0
O C 1 - A t r i p O n
2 1 / S e p / 2 0 0 2 4 7 9
O C 1 - A O n
The time is displayed by pressing the key.
/ 3 E . r e c o r d
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 1 1
D I F t r i p O n
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 1 0 9
D I F - A O n
Press the key to return the screen with date.
To clear all the event records, do the following:

 82 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records

Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only
the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the
following sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.

 Select "D. record" to display the "D. record" screen.
/ 2 D . r e c o r d
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r
 Select "Display" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 D . r e c o r d
# 1 1 6 / J u l / 2 0 0 1
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 4 0 1
# 2 2 0 / M a y / 2 0 0 1
1 5 : 2 9 : 2 2 . 3 8 8
# 3 0 4 / F e b / 2 0 0 1
1 1 : 5 4 : 5 3 . 4 4 4
# 4 2 8 / J a n / 2 0 0 1
0 7 : 3 0 : 1 8 . 8 7 6
To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:

 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter

 Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/ 2 C o u n t e r
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r T r i p s
 C l e a r T r i p s A (*)
 83 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 C l e a r T r i p s B (*)
 C l e a r T r i p s C (*)
 C l e a r  I ^ y A
 C l e a r  I ^ y B
 C l e a r  I ^ y C
 C l e a r C F
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.
 Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.
/ 3 C o u n t e r
T r i p s     
T r i p s A      (*1)
T r i p s B      (*1)
T r i p s C      (*1)
 I ^ y A       E 6
 I ^ y B       E 6
 I ^ y C       E 6
C F      
C F - L       (*2)
F E R    .  %
Note (*1): These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.
(*2): This count is the number of CF for CF-PER setting time and cannot be reset manually..
To clear each count, do the following:

 Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s ?
 Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s A ?
 Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s B ?
 Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s C ?
 Select "Clear  I^yA" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r  I ^ y A ?
 Select "Clear  I^yB" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r  I ^ y B ?
 84 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 Select "Clear  I^yC" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r  I ^ y C ?
 Select "Clear CF (Communication failure)" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r C F ?
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.4 Displaying the Status
From the sub-menu of "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:
Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of measuring elements output
Status of time synchronisation source
Status of clock adjustment
Status of LCD contrast
The data are updated every second.
4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data

To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
/ 1 S t a t u s
 M e t e r i n g
 B i n a r y I / O
 R e l a y e l e m e n t
 T i m e s y n c .
 C l o c k a d j u s t .
 L C D c o n t r a s t
 Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 2 M e t e r i n g
 C u r r e n t
 D e m a n d
 Select "Current" to display the current power system quantities on the "Metering" screen.
/ 3 C u r r e n t
I a   .   k A
   .  
I b   .   k A
   .  
I c   .   k A
   .  
 85 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
   .  
   .  
I 1   .   k A
   .  
I 2   .   k A
   .  
I 0   .   k A
   .  
I 2 / I 1   .  
I a R   .   k A Remote terminal current, A-phase
   .  
I b R   .   k A ditto, B-phase
   .  
I c R   .   k A ditto, C-phase
   .  
I d a   .   k A
I d b   .   k A
I d c   .   k A
I r a   .   k A
I r b   .   k A
I r c   .   k A
I p u a   .   k A
I p u b   .   k A
I p u c   .   k A
T H M    .  %
R L    .  %
 Select "Demand" to display the current demand on the "Metering" screen.

/ 3 D e m a n d
I a m a x   .   k A
I b m a x   .   k A
I c m a x   .   k A
I e m a x   .   k A Available for model 110 and 410.
I e m a x     .  A Available for model 120 and 420.
I 2 m a x   .   k A
I 0 m a x   .   k A
I 2 1 m a x   .  
To clear all max data, do the following:
 Press the RESET key on any max demand screen (primary or secondary) to display the
following confirmation screen.
C l e a r m a x ?
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all max data stored in non-volatile memory.
If the primary side unit (A) is required, select 2(=Pri-A) on the "Metering" screen. See Section
4.2.6.6.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, Press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.
4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs

To display the binary input and output status, do the following:
 86 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
O P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
The display format is shown below.
[       ]
Input (IP) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8
Output (OP) TP1 TP2 BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 FAIL
Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI8 correspond to each binary input signal. All binary
input signals are configurable. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the
photo-coupler output circuit.
Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO5 are configurable. The status
of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the output relay
driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
To display all the lines, press the and keys.
4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements

To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:
 Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.
/ 2 R y e l e m e
n t
D I F [ 0 0 0
0 ]
O C 1 - 2 [ 0 0 0
0 0 0 ]
O C 3 - 4 [ 0 0 0
0 0 0 ]
O C 5 [ 0 0 0 ]
E F 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0
0 ]
S E 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0
0 ]
U C 1 - 2 [ 0 0 0
0 0 0 ]
T H M [ 0 0 ]
B C [ 0 ]
C B F [ 0 0 0 ]
C o l d L d [ 0 0 0 0 ]
The displayed elements depend on relay model. (See Table 1.1.1 in Section 1.)
The operation status of measuring elements are shown as below.
[     ]
DIF A B C DIF element
OC1-2 OC1-A OC1-B OC1-C OC2-A OC2-B OC2-C OC1, OC2 elements
OC3-4 OC3-A OC3-B OC3-C OC4-A OC4-B OC4-C OC3, OC4 elements
OC5 OC5-A OC5-B OC5-C
EF1-4 EF1 EF2 EF3 EF4
SE1-4 SE1 SE2 SE3 SE4
NC NC1 NC2 - -
 87 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
UC1-2 UC1-A UC1-B UC1-C UC2-A UC2-B UC2-C UC1, UC2 elements
THM Alarm Trip - -
BC BC - - -
CBF A B C -
Cold Ld 0 1 2 3 Cold Load state
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element
is in operation.
4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source

The internal clock of the GRL150 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary
input signal clock, RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) clock or IEC60870-5-103. To
display on the LCD whether these clocks are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock
the relay is synchronised with, do the following:
 Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.
/ 2 T i m e s y n c .
 B I : A c t .
R S M : I n a c t .
I E C : I n a c t .
I R I G : I n a c t . Available for model 4 series only.
The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.
Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the
status becomes "inactive".
For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.
4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment

To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
 Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.
/ 2 1 2 / N o v / 2 0 0 1
2 2 : 5 6 : 1 9
Mi n u t e
5 6 _
H o u r
2 2
D a y
1 2
M o n t h
1 1
Y e a r
2 0 0 1
Line 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is
running locally. When [BI], [RSM], [IEC] or [IRIG] is active, the adjustment is invalid.
 Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details to enter a
numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.
 88 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to
the previous screen.
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing
the CANCEL key and adjust again.
4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast

To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:
 Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
/ 2 L C D c o n t r a s t
 Press the or key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thin by
pressing the key and deep by pressing the key.
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings
The sub-menu "Set.(view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set.(change)".
The following items are displayed:
Relay version
Description
Relay address and baud rate in the RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or
IEC60870-5-103 communication
Record setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.
4.2.5.1 Relay Version

To view the relay version, do the following.
 Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.
/ 1 S e t . ( v i e w )
 V e r s i o n
 D e s c r i p t i o n
 C o m m s
 R e c o r d
 S t a t u s
 P r o t e c t i o n
 B i n a r y I / P
 89 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 B i n a r y O / P
 L E D
 Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.

/ 2 V e r s i o n
 R e l a y t y p e
 S e r i a l N o .
 S o f t w a r e
 P L C d a t a
 I E C 1 0 3 d a t a
 Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number.
G R L 1 5 0 - 1 0 0 A - 1 0
- 1 0
 Select "Serial number" to display the relay manufacturing number.

 Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version.
G S 1 P M 1 - 0 1 - 
 Select "PLC data" to display the PLC data.

 Select "IEC103 data" to display the IEC103 configuration data.
4.2.5.2 Settings
The "Description", "Comms", "Record", "Status", "Protection", "Binary I/P", "Binary O/P" and
"LED" screens display the current settings input using the "Set.(change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6 Changing the Settings
The "Set.(change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Relay address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103 communication
Recording setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.
CAUTION
Modification of settings : Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group",
"scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between
the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive)
depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary
 90 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
settings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.
Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is
recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active
group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.
4.2.6.1 Setting Method

There are three setting methods as follows:
- To enter a selected item
- To enter a text string
- To enter numerical values
To enter a selected item

If a screen as shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.
The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys.
If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/ 1 S e t . ( c h a n g e)
 P a s s w o r d
 C o m m s
 R e c o r d
 S t a t u s
 P r o t e c t i o n
 B i n a r y I / P
 L E D
 Move the cursor to a setting item.

 Press the ENTER key.
To enter a text string

Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
 P l a n t n a m e
To select a character, use keys , , and to move blinking cursor down, up, left and right. "
 " and "  " on each of lines 4, 8 and 10 indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A
maximum of 22 characters can be entered.
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z 
a b c d e f g
h i j k l m n
o p q r s t u
v w x y z 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 
 91 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
( )   @_ {
}  /    
 ! “ # $ % &
‘ : ; , . ˆ `
 Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "" or "" and pressing the ENTER key.
 Move the blinking cursor to a selecting character.

 Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.
 Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered character, do either of the following:
 Discard the character by selecting "" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character.
 Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first.
To enter numerical values

When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The
cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and keys. If
setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/ 4 T i m e / s t a r t e r
T i m e s
2 . 0 _
O C A
2 . 0 0
E F A
0 . 6 0
S E F A
0 . 2 0 0
 Move the cursor to a setting line.
 Press the or key to set a desired value. The value is up or down by pressing the or
key.
 Press the ENTER key to enter the value.
 After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.
 If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new
numerical value.
 If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correcting line by pressing the
and keys and enter the new numerical value.
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all
the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper
one.
 92 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
To complete the setting
Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings
are not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the
following steps.
 Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen
shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the
"Set.(change)" sub-menu.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
 When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new settings,
or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen turns back
to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries made so far
and to turn to the "Set.(change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2 Password
For the sake of security of Setting changes and Testing, password protection can be set as follows:
 Select "Set.(change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.
 Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
/ 2 P a s s w o r d
 S e t t i n g
 T e s t
 Select "Setting" to set the password for the setting change.

 Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
I n p u t  _ 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
 For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
R e t y p e  _ 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
 Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
 Select "Test" to set the password for the test.

Set the password the same manner as that of the "Setting" above.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
and the testing screens.
If "Set.(change)" or "Test" is entered on the top "MENU" screen, the password trap screen
 93 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
"Password" is displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the
"Set.(change)" sub-menu screens.
P a s s w o r d  _ 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The
"Set.(change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password
Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MENU" screen. The
screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRL150 is canceled. Set the password again.
4.2.6.3 Plant Name

To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.
 Select "Set.(change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the " Set.(change)" screen.
 Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
 P l a n t n a m e
 To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.
 To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z 
a b c d e f g
h i j k l m n
o p q r s t u
v w x y z 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 
( )   @_ {
}  /    
 ! “ # $ %&
‘ : ; , . ˆ `
 Enter the text string.
4.2.6.4 Communication
If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103
communication, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:
 Select "Set.(change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set.(change)" screen.
 94 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.

/ 2 C o m m s .
 A d d r . / P a r a m .
 S w i t c h
 Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.
/ 3 A d d r . / P a r a m
H D L C
1 _
I E C
2
 Enter the relay address number on "HDLC" line for RSM or "IEC" line for IEC60870-5-103
and press the ENTER key.
CAUTION Do not overlap the relay address number.

 Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud
rate), etc., of the RSM and IEC60870-5-103.
/ 3 S w i t c h .
P r o t o c o l 0 _
H D L C / I E C
2 3 2 C 0
9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2 / 5 7 . 6
I E C B R 1
9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2
I E C B L K 0
N o r m a l / B l o c k e d
 Select the number and press the ENTER key.
<Protocol>
This setting is for changing the protocol (HDLC or IEC) of the channel 1 (COM1 port). In the
model with two channels (COM1 and COM2 ports), this setting for COM1 should be “HDLC”.
 When the remote RSM system applied, select 0(=HDLC). When the IEC60870-5-103 applied,
select 1(=IEC103).
CAUTION When changing the setting to the HDLC during the IEC103 operation, the
IEC103 command INF18 in Appendix M is canceled.
The output of IEC103 command INF18 can be observed by assigning their
signal numbers to LEDs or binary output relays (see Sections 4.2.6.9 and
4.2.6.10).
<232C>
This line is to select the RS-232C baud rate when the RSM system applied.
Note: The default setting of the 232C is 9.6kbps. The 57.6kbps setting, if possible, is recommended to
serve user for comfortable operation. The setting of RSM100 is also set to the same baud rate.
<IECBR>
This line is to select the baud rate when the IEC60870-5-103 system applied.
 95 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
<IECBLK>
Enter 1(=Blocked) to block the monitor direction in the IEC60870-5-103 communication.
4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording

To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
 Select "Set.(change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set.(change)" screen.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.
/ 2 R e c o r d
 E . r e c o r d
 D . r e c o r d
 C o u n t e r
Setting the event recording

/ 3 E . r e c o r d
B I T R N
   _
E V 1
    _
E V 2
    _
:
:
E V 1 2 8
    _
 Enter the number and press the ENTER key.
<BITRN>
 Enter the number of bi-trigger (on/off) trigger events.
<EV>
 Enter the signal number to be assigned.
Setting the disturbance recording

/ 3 D . r e c o r d
 T i m e / s t a r t e r
 S c h e m e s w
 B i n a r y s i g .
 Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.

/ 4 T i m e / s t a r t e r
T i m e s
2 . 0 _
O C A
2 . 0 0
 96 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
E F A
0 . 6 0
S E F A
0 . 2 0 0
 Enter the recording time and starter element settings.
To set each starter to use or not to use, do the following:
 Select "Scheme sw" on the "D. record" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T r i p 1 _
O f f / O n
O C 1
O f f / O n
E F 1
O f f / O n
S E F 1
O f f / O n
 Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.
To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:
 Select "Binary sig." on the "D. record" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.
/ 4 B i n a r y s i g .
S I G 1
1 0 1 _
S I G 2
1 0 2
S I G 3 2
1 3 3
 Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix B.
Setting the counter

/ 3 C o u n t e r
 S c h e m e s w
 T h r e s h o l d s e t
To set each counter to use or not to use, do the following:
 Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T C S P E N 0 _
O f f / O n / O p t - O n
C B S M E N 0
O f f / O n
D S S M E N 0
O f f / O n
T C A E N 0
O f f / O n
 I y A E N 0
 97 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
O f f / O n
O P T A E N 0
O f f / O n
F E R A E N 0
O f f / O n
 Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.
To set threshold setting, do the following:
 Select "Threshold set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Threshold" screen.
/ 4 T h r e s h o l d
T C A
L M
1 0
0 0 0 _
 I y
A L M E 6
1 0
0 0 0
Y V A
L U E
2 . 0
O P T A L M m s
1 0 0 0
C F - P E R s (*)
6 0
F E R A L M %
2 0 . 0
(*)Note: This is used to count CF which occurs for a period time (CF-PER setting).
The result is displayed on the CF-L of " RecordCounterDisplay " menu.
 Enter the threshold settings.
4.2.6.6 Status
To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:
Select "Status" on the "Set.(change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.
/ 2 S t a t u s
 M e t e r i n g
 T i m e s y n c .
 T i m e z o n e Option
Setting the metering

 Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/ 3 M e t e r i n g
D i s p l a y 1 _
P r i / S e c / P r i - A
 Enter 0 or 1 or 2 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=Pri) to display the primary side current in kilo-amperes(kA).
Enter 1(=Sec) to display the secondary side current.
Enter 2(=Pri-A) to display the primary side current in amperes(A).
Setting the time synchronisation

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal, RSM clock, or
 98 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
by an IEC60870-5-103. This is selected by setting as follows.

 Select "Time sync." to display the "Time sync" screen.
/ 3 T i m e s y n c .
T i m e s y n c . 0 _
O f f / B I / R S / I E / I R RS:RSM, IE:IEC, IR:IRIG-B(available for model 4 series only)
 Enter 0, 1, 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=off) not to be synchronised with any external signals.
Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.
Enter 2(=RS) to be synchronised with the RSM clock.
Enter 3(=IE) to be synchronised with IEC60870-5-103.
Enter 3(=IR) to be synchronised with IRIG-B.
Note: When selecting BI, RSM, IEC or IRIG-B, check that they are active on the "Status" screen in
"Status" sub-menu.
If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because event records will
become full soon. (See Section 4.2.6.5.)
If it is set to an inactive BI, RSM, IEC or IRIG-B, the calendar clock runs locally.
Setting the time zone

When the calendar clock is synchronized with the IRIG-B time standard, it is possible to transform
GMT to the local time.
 Select "Time zone" to display the "Time zone" screen.
/ 3 T i m e z o n e
G M T h r s
+ 9 _
 Enter the difference between GMT and local time and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.7 Protection
The GRL150 can have 4 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the
operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the
following:
 Select "Protection" on the "Set.(change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
/ 2 P r o t e c t i o n
 C h a n g e a c t . g p .
 C h a n g e s e t .
 C o p y g p .
Changing the active group

 Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.
/ 3 C h a n g e a c t .
g p .
A c t i v e g p . 1 _
 99 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.
Changing the settings

Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the
default values, see Appendix G. To change the settings, do the following:
 Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.
/ 3 A c t g p . = 
 C o m m o n
 G r o u p 1
 G r o u p 2
 G r o u p 3
 G r o u p 4
Changing the Common settings

 Select "Common" to set the AC input imbalance monitoring and the differential current
monitoring, and press the ENTER key.
/ 4 C o m m o n
C T S V E N 2 _
O f f / A L M & B L K / A L M
I D S V E N 2 _
O f f / A L M & B L K / A L M
CTSVEN
To set AC input imbalance monitoring enable, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=ALM&BLK) or 2(=ALM) by pressing the or key and press the
ENTER key.
 IDSVEN
To set differential current monitoring enable, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=ALM&BLK) or 2(=ALM) by pressing the or key and press the
ENTER key.
Changing the Group settings

 Select the "Group" on the "Act gp.= *" screen to change the settings and press the ENTER
key.
/ 4 G r o u p 
 P a r a m e t e r
 T e l e c o m m .
 T r i p
Setting the parameter

Enter the line name and the CT ratio as follows:
 Select "Parameter" on the "Group " screen to display the "Parameter" screen.
/ 5 P a r a m e t e r
 L i n e n a m e
 100 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 C T r a t i o
 Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.

 Enter the line name as a text string and press the EN D key.
 Select "CT ratio" to display the "CT ratio" screen.
/ 6 C T r a t i o
C T
4 0 0 _
E F C T Available for model 120 and 420
4 0 0 _
Setting the telecommunication

To set the telecommunication, do the following.
 Select "Telecomm." on the "Group " screen to display the "Telecomm." screen.
/ 5 T e l e c o m m .
 S c h e m e s w
 T h r e s h o l d s e t
Setting the scheme switch of telecommunication
 Select "Scheme sw" on the "Telecomm." screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 6 S c h e m e s w
S P . S Y N 0 _
M a s t e r / S l a v e
C O M . I / F 0 _ Available for model 400, 410 and 420.
P W / O P T
R L - M O D E 0 _
A u t o / M a n u a l
SP.SYN
To set Master or Slave terminal in sampling synchronisation, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Master) or 1(=Slave) by pressing the or key and press the ENTER key.
 COM.I/F
To set PW (pilot-wire) or OPT (fibre optic) in communication system, do the following.
 Enter 0(=PW) or 1(=OPT) by pressing the or key and press the ENTER key.
 RL-MODE
To set the receiving signal mode, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Auto) or 1(=Manual) by pressing the or key and press the ENTER key.
Setting the threshold of telecommunication

 Select "Threshold set" on the "Telecomm." screen to display the "Threshold" screen.
/ 6 T h r e s h o l d
 101 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
M . R L %
2 0 . 0 _
 Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
Setting the trip function

To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.
 Select "Trip" on the "Group " screen to display the "Trip" screen.
/ 5 T r i p
 S c h e m e s w
 P r o t . e l e m e n t
Setting the scheme switch

 Select "Scheme sw" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 6 S c h e m e s w
 A p p l i c a t i o n
 D I F
 O C
 E F Available for model 110 and 410.
 S E F Available for model 120 and 420.
 M i s c
 C L P / I C D
Setting the application

To set the application setting, do the following.
 Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.
/ 7 A p p l i c a t i o n
M O C 1 1 _
D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
M E F 1 1 _
D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
M S E 1 1 _
D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
O T D 1 _
O f f / O n
MOC1, MEF1, MSE1

To set the OC1, EF1 and SEF1 time delay characteristic type, do the following.
 Enter 0(=D: DT) or 1(=IEC) or 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US) or 4(=C: CON) and press the ENTER
key.
OTD
 Enter 1(=On) to set the open terminal detection OTD enable. If disabling the OTD, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the DIF protection

The settings for the DIF protection are as follows:
 102 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 Select "DIF" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "DIF" screen.
/ 7 D I F
D I F E N 1 _
O f f / O n
D I F - F S 0 _
O f f / O n
DIFEN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the DIF and press the ENTER key. If disabling the DIF, enter 0(=Off)
DIF-FS
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the fail-safe function DIF-FS and press the ENTER key. If disabling
the DIF-FS, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the OC protection

The settings for the OC protection are as follows:
 Select "OC" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "OC" screen.
/ 7 O C
O C 1 E N 1 _
O f f / O n
M O C 1 C - I E C 0
N I / V I / E I / L T I
M O C 1 C - I E E E 0
M I / V I / E I
M O C 1 C - U S 0
C O 2 / C O 8
O C 1 R 0
D E F / D E P
O C 2 E N 0
O f f / O n
O C 3 E N 0
O f f / O n
O C 4 E N 0
O f f / O n
OCEN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the OC and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OC, enter
MOC1C
To set the OC1 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
 If [MOC1] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
 If [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
 103 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 If [MOC1] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
OC1R
To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.
 If [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
 Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the EF protection for model 110 and 410

The settings for the EF protection are as follows:
 Select the "EF" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "EF" screen.
/ 7 E F
E F 1 E N 1 _
O f f / O n / P O P
M E F 1 C - I E C 0
N I / V I / E I / L T I
M E F 1 C - I E E E 0
M I / V I / E I
M E F 1 C - U S 0
C O 2 / C O 8
E F 1 R 0
D E F / D E P
E F 2 E N 0
O f f / O n
E F 3 E N 0
O f f / O n
E F 4 E N 0
O f f / O n
EFEN
 Enter 1(=On) to use an earth fault protection and press the ENTER key. If disabling the EF,
enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
MEF1C
To set the EF1 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
 If [MEF1] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
 If [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
 If [MEF1] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
EF1R
 104 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 If [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the SEF protection for model 120 and 420

The settings for the SEF protection are as follows:
 Select "SEF" on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "SEF" screen.
/ 7 S E F
S E 1 E N 1 _
O f f / O n
M S E 1 C - I E C 0
N I / V I / E I / L T I
M S E 1 C - I E E E 0
M I / V I / E I
M S E 1 C - U S 0
C O 2 / C O 8
S E 1 R 0
D E F / D E P
S E 1 S 2 0
O f f / O n
S E 2 E N 0
O f f / O n
S E 3 E N 0
O f f / O n
S E 4 E N 0
O f f / O n
SEEN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the SEF and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SEF, enter
MSE1C
To set the SEF1 Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
 If [MSE1] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the ENTER
key.
 If [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER key.
 If [MSE1] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
SE1R
 If [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the ENTER key.
 105 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
SE1S2
To set the Stage 2 Timer Enable, do the following.
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the SE1S2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SE1S2, enter
Setting the Misc. protection

The settings for the miscellaneous protection are as follows:
 Select "Misc." on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "Misc." screen.
/ 7 M i s c .
U C 1 E N 0 _
O f f / O n
U C 2 E N 0
O f f / O n
T H M E N 0
O f f / O n
T H M A E N 0
O f f / O n
B C D E N 0
O f f / O n
B T C 0
O f f / O n
R T C 0
O f f / D I R / O C
T T S W 1 0
O f f / T r i p / B O
T T S W 2 0
O f f / T r i p / B O
UCEN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the UC and press the ENTER key. If disabling the UC, enter
THMEN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal OL and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Thermal
OL, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
THMAEN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal Alarm and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Thermal Alarm, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 106 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
BCDEN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the Broken Conductor and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Broken Conductor, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
BTC
 Enter 1(=On) to set the Back-trip control and press the ENTER key. If not setting the
Back-trip control, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
RTC
To set the Re-trip control, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=Direct) or 2(=OC controlled) and press the ENTER key.
TTSW
 Enter 1(=Trip) to assign a transfer trip command to the binary output for tripping and enter
2(=BO) to assign a transfer trip command to a configurable binary output, and press the
ENTER key. If disabling the transfer trip function, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER
key.
Setting the CLP / ICD

The settings for the CLP/ICD are as follows:
 Select "Misc." on the "Scheme sw" screen to display the "Misc." screen.
/ 7 C L P / I C D
C L E N 0 _
O f f / O n
C L D O E N 0
O f f / O n
D I F - I C D 0
N A / B L K
O C - I C D 0
N A / B L K
CLEN
To set the Cold load function enable, do the following.
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the Cold Load function and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Cold Load, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
CLDOEN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the Cold Load drop-off and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Cold Load drop-off, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
DIF-ICD
 Enter 1(=BLK) to block the DIF tripping when the ICD detects inrush current. If not to block,
enter 0(=NA) and press the ENTER key.
 107 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
OC-ICD
 Enter 1(=BLK) to block the OC, EF and SEF tripping when the ICD detects inrush current. If
not to block, enter 0(=NA) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the protection elements

To set the protection elements, do the following.
 Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.
/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t
 D I F
 O C
 E F
 S E F
 M i s c
 C L P / I C D
Setting the DIF elements

 Select "DIF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "DIF" screen.
/ 7 D I F
D I F I
1 A
1 .
0 0 _
D I F I
2 A
1 0
. 0 _
D I F S
V % Differential current supervision
5 0 _
T I D S V s Differential current supervision timer
1 0 _
 Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Prot. element" screen.
Setting the OC elements

 Select "OC" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "OC" screen.
/ 7 O C
O C 1 A
1 . 0 0
T O C 1 M
1 . 0 0 0
 108 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
T O C 1 s
1 . 0 0
T O C 1 R s
0 . 0
T O C 1 R M
1 . 0 0 0
O C 2 A
5 . 0 0
T O C 2 s
0 . 0 0
O C 3 A
1 0 . 0 0
T O C 3 s
0 . 0 0
O C 4 A
2 0 . 0 0
T O C 4 s
0 . 0 0
O C 1 - k OC1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0 . 0 0 0
O C 1 -  ditto
0 . 0 0
O C 1 - C ditto
0 . 0 0 0
O C 1 - k r ditto
0 . 0 0 0
O C 1 -  ditto
0 . 0 0
Setting the EF elements

 Select "EF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "EF" screen.
/ 7 E F
E F 1 A
0 . 3 0 _
T E F 1 M
1 . 0 0 0
T E F 1 s
1 . 0 0
T E F 1 R s
0 . 0
T E F 1 R M
1 . 0 0 0
E F 2 A
3 . 0 0
T E F 2 s
1 . 0 0
E F 3 A
 109 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
5 . 0 0
T E F 3 s
0 . 0 0
E F 4 A
1 0 . 0 0
T E F 4 s
0 . 0 0
E F 1 - k EF1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0 . 0 0 0
E F 1 -  ditto
0 . 0 0
E F 1 - C ditto
0 . 0 0 0
E F 1 - k r ditto
0 . 0 0 0
E F 1 -  ditto
0 . 0 0
Setting the SEF elements

 Select "SEF" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "SEF" screen.
/ 7 S E F
S E 1 A
0 . 0 1 0
T S E 1 M
1 . 0 0 0
T S E 1 s
1 . 0 0
T S E 1 R s
0 . 0
T S E 1 R M
1 . 0 0 0
T S 1 S 2 s
0 . 0 0
S E 2 A
0 . 0 1 0
T S E 2 s
1 . 0 0
S E 3 A
0 . 0 1 0
T S E 3 s
0 . 0 0
S E 4 A
0 . 0 10
T S E 4 s
0 . 0 0
S E 1 - k SE1 User configurable IDMT curve setting
0 . 0 0 0
 110 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
S E 1 -  ditto
0 . 0 0
S E 1 - C ditto
0 . 0 0 0
S E 1 - k r ditto
0 . 0 0 0
S E 1 -  ditto
0 . 0 0
Setting the Misc. protection elements

 Select "Misc." on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "Misc." screen.
/ 7 M i s c .
U C 1 A
0 . 4 0 _
T U C 1 s
1 . 0 0
U C 2 A
0 . 2 0
T U C 2 s
1 . 0 0
T H M A
1 . 0 0
T H M I P A
0 . 0 0
T T H M m i n
1 0 . 0
T H M A %
8 0
B C D
0 . 2 0
T B C D s
0 . 0 0
C B F A
0 . 5 0
T B T C s
0 . 5 0
T R T C s
1 . 0 0
 111 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Setting the CLP / ICD elements

 Select "CLP/ICD" on the "Prot. element" screen to display the "Cold Load" screen.
/ 7 C L P / I C D
O C 1 A
2 . 0 0 _
O C 2 A
1 0 . 0 0
O C 3 A
2 0 . 0 0
O C 4 A
4 0 . 0 0
O C 5 A
1 0 . 0
E F 1 A
2 . 0 0
E F 2 A
1 0 . 0 0
E F 3 A
2 0 . 0 0
E F 4 A
4 0 . 0 0
S E 1 A
0 . 0 2 0
S E 2 A
0 . 0 2 0
S E 3 A
0 . 0 2 0
S E 4 A
0 . 0 2 0
B C D
0 . 4 0
T C L E s
1 0 0
T C L R s
1 0 0
I C L O D A
0 5 . 0
T C L O D s
0 0 . 0
I C D 2 - f %
1 5
I C D O C A
0 . 1 0
Setting group copy

To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:
 Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.
 112 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
/ 3 C o p y A t o B
A _
B
 Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
 Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.8 Binary Input

The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.
Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.
 Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set.(change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / P
. B I 1
. B I 2
. B I 3
. B I 4
. B I 5
. B I 6
. B I 7
. B I 8
. A l a r m 1 T e x t
Selection of Binary Input

 Select the input relay number (BI number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BI"
screen.
/ 3 B I 
 T i m e r s
 F u n c t i o n s
Setting timers
 Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.
/ 4 T i m e r s
B I 1 P U D s Pick-up delay setting

0 . 0 0 _
B I 1 D O D s Drop-off delay setting
0 . 0 0
 After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
Setting Functions
 Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4 F u n c t i o n s
 113 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
B I 1 S N S 1 _
N o r m / I n v
BI1SNS
To set the Binary Input 1 Sense, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
Repeat the setting of other BI..
Setting Alarm  Text

 Select the Alarm text and press the ENTER key to display the text input screen.
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z 
a b c d e f g
h i j k l m n
o p q r s t u
v w x y z 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 
( )   @_ {
}  /    
 ! “ # $ %&
‘ : ; , . ˆ `
 Enter the characters (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.
4.2.6.9 Binary Output

All the binary outputs of the GRL150 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is
possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available
signals are listed in Appendix B.
It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.
Appendix C shows the factory default settings.
CAUTION
When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
Selection of output relay

 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set.(change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
 B O 1
 114 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 B O 2
 B O 3
 B O 4
 B O 5
Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter
0 to logic gates #1 to #4 in assigning signals.
 Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO"
screen.
/ 3 B O 
 L o g i c / R e s e t
Setting the logic gate type and timer

 Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t
L o g i c 0 _
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s / D l / D w / L a t
 Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing

 Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n # 1
2 1 _
I n # 2
1 1
I n # 3
2 4
I n # 4
0
T B O s
0 . 2 0
 Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix C. Do not assign the signal numbers 546 to 550 (signal names: "BO1
OP" to "BO5 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
 115 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
4.2.6.10 LEDs
Three LEDs of the GRL150 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to
indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses of which can be
viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix B can be assigned to
each LED as follows.
CAUTION
When having changed the LED settings, must release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
Selection of LEDs
 Select "LED" on the "Set.(change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/ 2 L E D
 L E D
 V i r t u a l L E D
Selection of real LEDs

 Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/ 3 L E D
 L E D 1
 L E D 2
 L E D 3
 Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.
/ 4 L E D 
 L o g i c / R e s e t
Setting the logic gate type and timer

 Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 5 L o g i c / R e s e t
L o g i c 0 _
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
 Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, refer to Section 4.2.1.
Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n # 1
 116 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
2 1 _
I n # 2
1 1
I n # 3
2 4
I n # 4
0
 Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix B.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
 Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.

Repeat this process for the LEDs to be configured.
Selection of virtual LEDs

 Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.
/ 3 V i r t u a l L E D
 I N D 1
 I N D 2
 Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND" screen.
/ 4 I N D 
 R e s e t
Setting the reset timing

 Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.
/ 5 R e s e t
R e s e t 0 _
I n s t / L a t c h
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "IND" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
B I T 1
5 1 _
B I T 2
5 4
B I T 8
7 8
 Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to
Appendix B.
 117 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).
 Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.

Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
4.2.7 Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and
forced operation of binary outputs. The password, if set, must be entered in order to enter the test
screens because the "Test" menu has password security protection. (See the section 4.2.6.2.)
Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs
during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a lighting state.
4.2.7.1 Scheme Switch

The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure in the items being
monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED
and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
 Select "Test" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/ 1 T e s t
 S w i t c h
 L o g i c c i r c u i t
 S i m . f a u l t
 Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.

/ 2 S w i t c h
A . M . F . 1 _
O f f / O n
C L P T S T 0
O f f / S 0 / S 3
T H M R S T 0
O f f / O n
I E C T S T 0
O f f / O n
L . T e s t 0
O f f / O n
T . T e s t 0
O f f / O n
C O M 1 0
O f f / O n
:
:
C O M 5 0
O f f / O n
S C O M 1 0
O f f / O n
:
:
 118 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
S C
O M 5 0
O f
f / O n
S 2
C O M 1 0
O f
f / O n
:
:
S 2 C O M 1 2 0
O f f / O n
<A.M.F.>
 Enter 0(=Off) to disable the A.M.F. and press the ENTER key.
<CLPTST>
 Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=State0) or 2(=State3) to set forcibly the test condition of the Cold Load
Protection (CLPTST) and press the ENTER key.
<THMRST>
The switch [THMRST] is used to perform the thermal overload element test because the resetting
time is in the order of minutes. The thermal overload element is instantaneously reset when the
[THMRST] is ON.
 Enter 1(=On) to reset forcibly the thermal overload element for testing and press the ENTER
key.
<IECTST>
 Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit ‘test mode’ to the control system by IEC60870-5-103
communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.
<L.TEST>
The switch [L. test] is used for local testing. When the switch [L. test] is set to "1" (= On), the
current data received from the remote terminal is set to zero. This switching is transmitted to the
remote terminal and the remote terminal sets the current data received from the switching terminal
to zero.
 Enter 1(=On) for local testing, and press the ENTER key.
<T.TEST>
The switch [T. test] is used for local testing of the current differential elements. When the [T. test]
is set to "1" (=On), the local current data is looped into the receiving circuit interrupting the current
data from the remote terminal as well as transmitted to the remote terminal.
Note: The switch [T. test] must be used only when all the terminals are out-of-service. If not, the local
test current may cause a disturbance at the in-service remote terminal because this switching is
not recognized at the remote terminal.
In case of electrical interface, the electrical cable must be removed to prevent signal interfering
between sending and the receiving data. The remote terminal will detect the communication
failure.
Caution
Do not test the loop back mode testing which the send data (TX) and the receive data (RX) is
connected together by optical cable, because the GRL150 is applied the half duplex
communication. Therefore, use the switch [T. test].
 119 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Do not use both [L.TEST] and [T.TEST] simultaneously. The [L.TEST] is for the test using
only the local terminal current, and the [T.TEST] for the test using the local current and the
local current looped back.
<COM>, <SCOM> and <S2COM>

These settings are used to forcibly send communication data [COM1] to [COM5], [SCOM1] to
[SCOM5] and [S2COM1] to [S2COM12] for testing. Enter 1(=On) for a desired communication
data and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
4.2.7.2 Binary Output Relay

It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with the external
devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD
displays the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
T P 1 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
T P 2 0
B O 1 0
B O 2 0
B O 3 0
B O 4 0
B O 5 0
F A I L
 Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
 After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
O p e r a t e ?
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.
 Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

 Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.
4.2.7.3 Logic Circuit

It is possible to observe the binary signal level on the signals listed in Appendix B with monitoring
jacks A and B.
 Select "Logic circuit" on the "Test" screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
 120 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
/ 2 L o g i c
c i r c u i t
T e r m A
1 _
T e r m B
4 8 _
 Enter a signal number to be observed at monitoring jack A and press the ENTER key.
 Enter the other signal number to be observed at monitoring jack B and press the ENTER key.
After completing the setting, the signals can be observed by the binary logic level at monitoring
jacks A and B or by the LEDs above the jacks.
On screens other than the above screen, observation with the monitoring jacks is disabled.
4.2.7.4 Sim. fault

The "Sim. fault" on the "Test" menu is used to generate a synchronized trigger signal for
end-to-end dynamic tests. The signal can be monitored when the signal FG (No.421) in the signal
list is assigned to a user configurable auxiliary relay (BO) at the local and remote terminals. The
auxiliary relays trigger a simultaneous test current application to the local and remote terminal
differential elements when the END key is pressed on the "Sim. fault" screen at either terminal.
The signal transmission delay time is automatically compensated in the relay and the operation
time difference of the auxiliary relays is within 1ms. For the signal list, see Appendix B.
 Select "Sim. fault" on the "Test" screen to display the "Operate?" screen
O p e r a t e ?
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to generate the synchronized trigger signal.
The signal FG (No.421) operates.
 Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
 Press the CANCEL key to return to the "Test" screen.
 121 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
4.3 Personal Computer Interface

The relay can be operated from a personal computer using an RS232C port on the front panel.
On the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the fault currents are available in
addition to the items available on the LCD screen.
 Display of current and voltage waveforms: Oscillograph display
 Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span
 Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span
 Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span
For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System

The Relay Setting and Monitoring (RSM) system is a system that retrieves and analyses the data
on power system quantities, fault and event records and views or changes settings in individual
relays via a telecommunication network using a remote PC.
Figure 4.4.1 shows the typical configuration of the RSM system via a protocol converter G1PR2.
The relays are connected through twisted pair cables, and the maximum 256 relays can be
connected since the G1PR2 can provide up to 8 ports. The total length of twisted pair wires should
not exceed 1200 m. Relays are mutually connected using an RS485 port on the relay rear panel and
connected to a PC RS232C port via G1PR2. Terminal resistor (150 ohms) is connected the last
relay. The transmission rate used is 64 kbits/s.
Twisted paired
cable
Figure 4.4.1 Relay Setting and Monitoring System
 122 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface

The GRL150 can support the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly
used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following
measurand, status data and general command from the relay to the control system.
 Measurand data: current
 Status data: events, fault indications, etc.
The IEC60870-5-103 function in the relay can be customized with the original software “IEC103
configurator”. It runs on a personal computer (PC) connected to the relay, and can help setting of
Time-tagged messages, General command, Metering, etc. For details of the setting method, refer
to “IEC103 configurator” manual. For the default setting of IEC60870-5-103, see Appendix M.
The protocol can be used through the RS485 port on the relay rear panel and can be also used
through the optional fibre optical interface.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps.
The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.
For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.4.
4.6 Clock Function

The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
 Event records
 Disturbance records
 Fault records
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the external clock such as the binary
time standard input signal, RSM clock, IEC60870-5-103 or IRIG-B (available for model 4
series only). This can be selected by setting.
The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the binary input signal
by the following method. A binary input Bin is assigned to SYNC_CLOCK signal (No. 2648) by
PLC. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or “OFF” signal which cannot express year-month-day and
hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is achieved by setting the number of milliseconds to zero.
This method will give accurate timing if the synchronising BI signal is input every second.
Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When
the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is
between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie the
number of seconds is incremented).
n sec (n+1) sec

500ms
corrected to (n+1) sec
corrected to n sec
t
When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1 and selected "RSM"
in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with the RSM
clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with the external time standard, then all the relay clocks
are synchronised with the external time standard.
 123 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
5. Installation
5.1 Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check
for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.
5.2 Relay Mounting

A flush mounting relay is included. Appendix E shows the case outline.
For details of relay withdrawal and insertion, see Section 6.7.3.
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
Do not take out the relay unit outside the relay case since electronic components on the modules
are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If it is absolutely essential to take the modules out of
the case, do not touch the electronic components and terminals with your bare hands.
Additionally, always put the module in a conductive anti-static bag when storing it.
5.4 Handling Precautions

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand
volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits
can cause serious damage. This damage often may not be immediately apparent, but the reliability
of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.
Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing the relay unit unnecessarily.
The relay unit incorporates the highest practical protection for its semiconductor devices.
However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, precautions should be taken to
preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and
manufactured.
CAUTION
 Before removing the relay unit, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the
equipment by touching the case.
 Use the handle to draw out the relay unit. Avoid touching the electronic components,
printed circuit board or connectors.
 Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
 Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same
potential as yourself.
 Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.
 124 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried

out in a Special Handling Area such as described in the aforementioned IEC 60747.
5.5 External Connections

Typical external connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix F.
 125 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
6. Commissioning and Maintenance

6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
The GRL150 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and the
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid
personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits
function when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
Measuring elements
Metering and recording
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external
equipment.
The following tests are included:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Telecommunication circuit test
Tripping circuit test
 126 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
6.2 Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions
CAUTION
 The relay rack is provided with an earthing terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the relay rack is earthed.
 When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach
the cover provided on top of it.
 Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
6.2.2 Cautions on Tests
CAUTION
 While the power is on, do not drawout/insert the relay unit.
 Before turning on the power, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
 If dc power has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records, event
records and disturbance records and internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring the
power. This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain
data. The internal clock must be set again.
 Be careful that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
 If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings. For the
settings, refer to Section 4.2.7.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
 127 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
6.3 Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
2 Single-phase current sources
1 Dynamic three-phase test set (for protection scheme test)
1 DC power supply
2 DC voltmeters
2 AC ammeters
1 Phase angle meter
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the following appendixes:

Appendix C Binary Output Default Setting List
Appendix G Relay Setting Sheet
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC current and frequency ratings, and
auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the RS232C port on the front of the relay.
RSM100 software is required to run the PC.
For the details, see the separate instruction manual "RSM100".
 128 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
6.4 Hardware Tests

The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a DC power supply and AC current and
voltage sources are required.
6.4.1 User Interfaces
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
LCD display
 Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the LCD is off.
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "Err: " screen when the DC voltage is applied.
 Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that black dots appear on the whole
screen.
LED display
 Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit in green.
 Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that remaining five LEDs are lit in
red or yellow. (Programmable LEDs are yellow.)
VIEW and RESET keys

 Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off and check that the "Virtual LED" and "Metering"
screens are sequentially displayed on the LCD.
 Press the RESET key and check that the LCD turns off.
Other operation keys

 Press any key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MENU" screen. Press
the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Repeat this for all keys.
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.2.1.
 129 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
GRL150
TB2 - A1
BI1
- B1 BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
- A8 BI7
BI8
- B8
DC  TB2 -A9
power
supply  - B9
Figure 6.4.2.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit
 Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
O P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
 Apply the rated DC voltage to terminal A1-B1, A2-B2, ..., A8-B8 of terminal block TB2.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For
details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
The user will be able to perform this test for one terminal to another or for all the terminals at once.
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit
This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers
and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output
contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displays
the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
T P 1 0 _
T P 2 0
B O 1 0
B O 2 0
B O 3 0
B O 4 0
B O 5 0
F A I L
 130 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
 After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be
performed collectively.
O p e r a t e ?
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
 Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.

 Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits
This test can be performed by applying the checking currents to the AC input circuits and
verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.4.1. A single-phase current source is required.
GRL150
A TB1 -1 Ia
Single-phase -2
current
source -3 Ib
-4
-5
Ic
-6
-7
I
-8 e
 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9
Figure 6.4.4.1 Testing AC Input Circuit
To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the followings.

"Set. (view)" sub-menu  "Status" screen  "Metering" screen
If the setting is 0(= Primary), change the setting to 1(=Secondary) in the "Set. (change)"
sub-menu.
"Set. (change)" sub-menu  "Status" screen  "Metering" screen
Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.
 Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.
"Status" sub-menu  "Metering" screen
 Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within 5% of the input values.
 131 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
6.5 Function Test

CAUTION
The function test may cause the output relays to operate including the tripping output relays.
Therefore, the test must be performed with tripping circuits disconnected.
6.5.1 Measuring Element
Measuring element characteristics are realized by software, so it is possible to verify the overall
characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by the binary output signal at monitoring jacks A
or B or by the LED indications above the jacks. In any case, the signal number corresponding to
each element output must be set on the "Logic circuit" screen of the "Test" sub-menu.
/ 2 L o g i c
c i r c u i t
T e r m A
1 _
T e r m B
4 8 _
When a signal number is entered for the Term A line, the signal is observed at monitoring jack A
and when entered for the Term B line, it is observed at monitoring jack B.
Note: The voltage level at the monitoring jacks is +5V for logic level "1" and less than 0.1V for
logic level "0".
CAUTION
 Use test equipment with more than 1 k of internal impedance when observing the output
signal at the monitoring jacks.
 Do not apply an external voltage to the monitoring jacks.
 Do not leave the A or B terminal shorted to 0V terminal for a long time.
In case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase
element is selected hereafter.
Note: Operating time test of measuring relay elements at monitoring jack A or B is not
including the operation of binary output. Whole the operating time test, if required,
should be measured at a binary output relay.
 132 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
6.5.1.1 Phase current differential element DIF

The phase current differential element is checked for the following items.
Operating current value

Percentage restraining characteristic
The top two items are tested locally or under an end-to-end setup of each terminal relay.
The last item is tested only under an end-to-end setup of each terminal relay.
Operating current value

Figure 6.5.1.1 shows the circuit to test the element locally.
GRL150
TB1 -1
A TX
Single-phase
current Ia
RX
source -2
A
Monitoring
jack
DC  TB2 -A9
0V
power
supply  -B9
DC
voltmeter
Figure 6.5.1.1 Testing Phase Current Differential Element
The output signal numbers of the DIF element are as follows.

Element Signal number
DIF-A 48
DIF-B 49
DIF-C 50
 Set the [L.test] to “1” (= On) on the “Switch” screen of the “Test” sub-menu. See Section 4.2.7.
 Select the "Logic circuit" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
 Enter a signal number 48 for Term A line to observe the DIF-A operation at monitoring jack A
 Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value at
which the element operates.
 Check that the measured value is within 7% of the setting DIFI1.
 133 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
End-to-end test setup

When the percentage restraint characteristic is checked, an end-to-end setup using two relays is
required.
If the relays can be collected and tested at a laboratory, the end-to-end test is possible by directly
connecting their communication ports. Figure 6.5.1.2 shows the testing circuit of the laboratory
end-to-end test.
The signal terminals of one relay are directly connected to those of another relay as shown in
Figure 6.5.1.2.
Relay A: GRL150
TB3-A16
 TB1 -1
A
Single-phase -A17
Ia
current
source TX
 -2
RX (*)
TB2 -A9
-B9 A
Monitoring
jack
E 0V
Relay B: GRL150
 A TB1 -1
Single-phase
Ia
current
source TX
 -2
RX
TB3-A16
-A17
DC TB2 -A9
power
supply -B9 A
Monitoring
jack
E 0V
Note(*): Connect TX and RX of the relay A to RX and TX of the relay B respectively in case of Fibre optic.
Connect TB3-A16 and -A17 of the relay A to TB3-A16 and -A17 of the relay B in case of Pilot wire.
Figure 6.5.1.2 End-to-end Test Setup at Laboratory
 134 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Percentage restraint characteristics

The percentage restraint characteristic is tested on the outflow current (Iout) and infeed current
(Iin) plane as shown in Figure 6.5.1.3 by applying an infeed current to one relay and an outflow
current to another relay.
Iout
Iin = Iout
DIFI2
B
DIFI1 DIFI1 + 7/5 DIFI2 Iin
DIFI1, DIFI2: Setting value
Figure 6.5.1.3 Percentage Restraining Characteristic on Iin-Iout Plane
Characteristic A is expressed by the following equation,

Iout  (5/7) (Iin - DIFI1)
Characteristic B is expressed by the following equation,
Iout  DIFI2
where, DIFI1 and DIFI2 are setting values.
 Select the "Logic circuit" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Logic circuit" screen.
 Enter a signal number 48 to observe the DIF-A output at monitoring jack A and press the
ENTER key.
 Apply a fixed infeed current to one relay. Apply an outflow current to another relay, change the
magnitude of the current applied and measure the value at which the element operates.
 Repeat the above by changing the magnitude of the infeed current.
 Check that the measured value of the outflow current is within 7% of the theoretical values
obtained using the equations mentioned above. (The infeed current is more than 0.5In).
 135 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
6.5.1.2 Overcurrent and undercurrent element OC1 to OC4, OC5, UC1, UC2 and CBF and Earth
fault element EF1 to EF4 and SEF1 to SEF4
The overcurrent element is checked on the operating current value and operating time for IDMT
curve.
Operating current check

Figure 6.5.1.4 shows a testing circuit. The operating current value is checked by increasing or
decreasing the magnitude of the current applied.
GRL150
 A TB1 -(*)
Single-phase
current
source
 -(*)
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
DC  TB2 -A9
power
supply  -B9
DC 
voltmeter
0V
(): Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.
Figure 6.5.1.4 Operating Current Value Test
The output signal of testing element is assigned to the monitoring jack A.

The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element Signal No. Element Signal No. Element Signal No. Element Signal No.
OC1-A 80 EF1 112 SEF1 116 UC1-A 176
OC2-A 84 EF2 113 SEF2 117 UC2-A 180
OC3-A 88 EF3 114 SEF3 118 CBF-A 124
OC4-A 92 EF4 115 SEF4 119 OC5-A 64
 Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
press the ENTER key.
 Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value
at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
 136 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Operating time check for IDMT curve

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.5.
GRL150
TB1 -
A ()
Single-phase
current
source - ()
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
(): Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element. Refer to Table 3.2.1.
Figure 6.5.1.5 Testing IDMT
One of the inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers of the IDMT
elements are as follows:
Element Signal No.
OC1-A 80
EF1 112
SEF1 116
Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the scheme switch MOC1, MEF1 or MSE1 on the
"OC", "EF" or "SEF" screen.
Example: "Settings" sub-menu  "Protection" screen  "Group" screen  "OC" screen
The test procedure is as follows:

 Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
 Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2  Is to 20  Is, where Is is the current setting.
 Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.3.1. Check that the measured operating time is within IEC 60255-3 class 5.
 137 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
6.5.1.3 Thermal overload element THM-A and THM-T

The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.1.6.
Element Signal No.
THM-A 189
THM-T 188
To test easily the thermal overload element, the scheme switch [THMRST] in the "Switch" screen
on the "Test" menu is used.
 Set the scheme switch [THMRST] to "ON".
 Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
 Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current
should be between 1.2  Is to 10  Is, where Is is the current setting.
CAUTION
After the setting of a test current, apply the test current after checking that the THM% has
become 0 on the "Metering" screen.
 Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.7. Check that the measured operating time is within 5%.
6.5.1.5 Broken conductor detection element BCD

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.7.
GRL150
Ia TB1 -1
A
-2
Three-phase Ib
Current A -3
source -4
Ic
A -5
-6
A
Monitoring
jack
0V
 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9
DC 
voltmeter
0V
Figure 6.5.7 Testing BCD element

 138 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Element Signal No.

BCD 142
 Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the monitoring jack A as shown in
Section 6.5.1.
 Apply the three-phase balance current at 10% of the rated current and interrupt a phase
current.
Then, check the BCD element operates.
6.5.1.6 Cold load protection

The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.1.
To check the cold load protection function, the scheme switch [CLPTST] in the "Switch" screen
on the "Test" menu is used. Test the item of OC1 shown in Section 6.5.1.1.
 Set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S0".
Check that the OC1 operates at the setting value of normal setting group.
 Next, set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S3".
Check that the OC1 operates at the setting value of cold load setting group [CLSG].
6.5.1.8 Current Change Detection Element OCD

The test circuit is shown in Figure 6.5.1.6.
GRL150
TB1 -1
A
Single-phase
current -2
source
A
Monitoring
TB2 -A9 jack
DC  0V
power
supply  -B9
DC
voltmeter
Figure 6.5.1.6 Testing Current Change Detection Element
The output signal number of the OCD is as follows:

Measuring element Signal number
OCD-A 68
Operation must be verified by abruptly changing the test current from 0 A to 1.2  Setting value or
vice versa.
OCD has a fixed setting of 0.4 A and 0.08 A for 5 A rating and 1 A rating respectively.
 139 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
6.5.2 Protection Scheme
Protection schemes implemented in GRL150 are basically for unit protection. It is recommended
that the protection schemes are tested under end-to-end mode. The setup of the end-to-end
synchronized test is described in Section 6.5.1.
In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.
The "Sim.fault" on the LCD "Test" menu is available to test local and remote terminals
synchronously. For use, see Section 4.2.7.4.
Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays after a simulated fault occurs.
Differential tripping
When a phase current is applied, instantaneous per phase based tripping or three-phase tripping is
performed depending on the fault types.
The tripping should be checked for the current which is two times or larger than the minimum
operating current DIFI1. Operating time is measured by the operating time of the tripping
command output relay. It will typically be 1 cycle.
Check that the indications and recordings are correct.
Check that the indications and recordings are correct.
Circuit Breaker failure tripping

 Set the scheme switch [BTC] to "ON" and [RTC] to "DIR" or "OC".
 Apply a fault, retain it and input an external trip signal. Check that the retrip output relays
operate after the time setting of the TRTC and the adjacent breaker tripping output relay
operates after the time setting of the TBTC.
6.5.3 Metering and Recording
The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault record"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.
Recording events are listed in Appendix G. There are internal events and external events by binary
input commands. Event recording on the external event can be checked by changing the status of
binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input circuit test
(see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event record" screen is
correct. Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display
only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance record"
screen and check that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on the PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details
on how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.
 140 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
6.6 Conjunctive Tests

6.6.1 On Load Test
To check the polarity of the current and voltage transformers, check the load current, system
voltage and their phase angle with the metering displays on the LCD screen.
 Open the "Auto-supervision" screen check that no message appears.
 Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the above.
/ 3 C u r r e n t
I a   .   k A
   .  
I b   .   k A
   .  
I c   .   k A
   .  
   .  
   .  
I 1   .   k A
   .  
I 2   .   k A
   .  
I 0   .   k A
   .  
I 2 / I 1   .  
I a R   .   k A
   .  
I b R   .   k A
   .  
I c R   .   k A
   .  
I d a   .   k A
I d b   .   k A
I d c   .   k A
I r a   .   k A
I r b   .   k A
I r c   .   k A
I p u a   .   k A
I p u b   .   k A
I p u c   .   k A
T H M    .  %
R L    .  %
Note: The magnitude of current can be set in values on the primary side or on the secondary side by
the setting. (The default setting is the secondary side.)
6.6.2 Communication Circuit Test
Check whether the communication circuit is correctly connected between the local terminal and
the remote terminal.
In pilot wire communication, a receiving signal adjusting function is provided, since the receiving
level is influenced by pilot-wire cable size, distance and installation environment. The receiving
signal can be adjusted automatically (Auto) or manually (Manual) by the scheme switch
 141 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
[RL-MODE]. When “Auto” is selected, the optimum signal receiving level, which has the least CF
(Communication Failure), is automatically set according to the receiving level (peak value). The
“Auto” is generally selected in normal operation. However, if a severe noise environment prevents
correct operation of GRL150, then “Manual” can be selected and the receiving level is chosen
manually. (See Section 3.3.5, 4.2.3.4 and 4.2.6.5.)
To set manual receiving level to the optimum value, the following procedure is to be followed:
1. In ‘Setting Change  Protection  Change Set  Group 1  Telecomm  Scheme Sw’
menu, set [RL-Mode] to ‘Manual’.
2. In ‘Status  Metering  Current’ menu, record the value of the receiving level ‘RL’.
3. In ‘Setting Change  Protection  Change Set  Group 1  Telecomm  Threshold Set’
menu, set the manual receive level, M-RL, to 0.5  RL value recorded in 2.
4. In ‘Record  Counter  Display’ menu, record value of communication failures per period,
CF-L.
5. Vary the value of M-RL in increments, recording the CF-L values at each stage.
6. The value of M-RL that should be used as the final setting is that at which the lowest value of
CF-L is recorded.
Input current at a remote terminal relay. Check the current by the "Metering" screen from the
"Status" sub-menu at the local relay.
6.6.3 Tripping Circuit Test
The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay
and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it is tripped. Forcible operation of the output
relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section
6.4.3.
 Set the breaker to be closed.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
T P 1 0 _
T P 2 0
B O 1 0
B O 2 0
B O 3 0
B O 4 0
B O 5 0
F A I L
 Enter 1 for TP1 and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
 142 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
O p e r a t e ?
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO1 and check that the A-phase
breaker is tripped.
 Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
 Repeat the above for TP1, BO2 to BO5 and FAIL.
 143 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary
input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test procedures
are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued with the binary output relay of
FAIL and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators or LCD display. It is also
recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1
shows LCD messages and failure locations.
The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).
Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB, DS or cable Comm. channel
Err: SUM 
Err: RAM 
Err: BRAM 
Err: EEP 
Err: A/D 
Err: Id (1)  (2)
Err: DC 
Err: TC (1)  (2)
Err: CT  (1)  (2)
Err: CB  (1)  (2)
Err: DS  (1)  (2)
Err: COM  (2)  (1)
Err: SYN  (2)  (1)
Err: RDY  (2)  (1)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.
If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the DC power
supply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the DC
power supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit
in both cases after checking if the correct DC voltage is applied to the relay.
If a failure is detected by automatic supervision or regular testing, replace the failed relay unit.
 144 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during the regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Modules are securely inserted in position.
- Correct DC power voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit
If the failure is identified to be in the relay unit and the user has a spare relay unit, the user can
recover the protection by replacing the failed relay unit.
Repair at the site should be limited to relay unit replacement. Maintenance at the component level
is not recommended.
Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (software
type form) as the removed relay.
The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.
Replacing the relay unit
CAUTION After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.
The procedure of relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:

 Switch off the DC power supply.
WARNING Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the
DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
 Disconnect the trip outputs.
 Short-circuit all AC current inputs.
 Unscrew the relay front cover.
 Unscrew the binding screw on the handle.
 To remove the relay unit from its case, pull up the handle and pull the handle towards you. (See
Figure 6.7.1.)
 Insert the (spare) relay unit in the reverse procedure.
CAUTION To avoid risk of damage:
 Keep the handle up when inserting the relay unit into the case.
 Do not catch the handle when carrying the relay unit.
 Check that the relay unit and its case have the identical Model Number
when inserting the relay unit.
 145 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
IN SERVICE VIEW IN SERVICE VIEW

TRIP TRIP
ALARM ALARM
RESET RESET
A B 0V CAN ENTER A B 0V CAN ENTER

CEL CEL
END END
Handle
Pull up handle
Bind screw
Figure 6.7.1 Handle of Relay Unit
6.7.4 Resumption of Service
After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following
procedures to restore the relay to the service.
 Switch on the DC power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the
"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
 Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.
6.7.5 Storage
The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the
storage temperature should be 25C to +70C, but the temperature of 0C to +40C is
recommended for long-term storage.
 146 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
7. Putting Relay into Service

The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing the
commissioning tests or maintenance tests.
 Check that all the external connections are correct.
 Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock
are correct.
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
 Clear any unnecessary records on faults, alarms, events, disturbances and counters which are
recorded during the tests.
 If dc power has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then internal clock may be
cleared soon after restoring the power. This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged
and may contain uncertain data. Set the internal clock again.
 Press the VIEW key and check that no failure message is displayed on the
"Auto-supervision" screen.
 Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.
Whilst the relay is put into service at one terminal by supplying DC power and not yet at the other
terminal, a communication failure will be detected by the automatic monitoring at the in-service
terminal and a red "ALARM" LED is lit. But it will be reset when the relays are put into service at
all terminals.
 147 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 148 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix A
and Implementation of Thermal Model
to IEC60255-8
 149 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8

The overcurrent stages for phase and earth faults, OC1 and EF1, each have a programmable reset feature.
Resetting may be instantaneous, definite time delayed, or, in the case of IEEE/US curves, inverse time
delayed.
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct
grading between relays at various points in the scheme. On the other hand, the inverse reset characteristic
is particularly useful to provide correct co-ordination with an upstream induction disc type overcurrent
relay.
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of intermittent
(‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions. An example of where such phenomena may be experienced is in
plastic insulated cables, where the fault energy melts the cable insulation and temporarily extinguishes the
fault, after which the insulation again breaks down and the process repeats.
An inverse time overcurrent protection with instantaneous resetting cannot detect this condition until the
fault becomes permanent, thereby allowing a succession of such breakdowns to occur, with associated
damage to plant and danger to personnel. If a definite time reset delay of, for example, 60 seconds is
applied, on the other hand, the inverse time element does not reset immediately after each successive fault
occurrence. Instead, with each new fault inception, it continues to integrate from the point reached during
the previous breakdown, and therefore operates before the condition becomes permanent. Figure A-1
illustrates this theory.
Intermittent
Fault Condition
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay

with Instantaneous
Reset
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay

with Definite Time
Reset
Delayed Reset
Figure A-1
 150 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-8

Heating by overload current and cooling by dissipation of an electrical system follow exponential time
constants. The thermal characteristics of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
I2  t 
 = 1  e    100% (1)
I AOL 
2 
where:
 = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
 = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal stateθis expressed as a percentage of the thermal capacity of the protected system, where
0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, that is the point at which no further
temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be disconnected. The thermal limit for any
given electrical plant is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay gives a trip output when θ = 100%.
If current I is applied to a cold system, then  will rise exponentially from 0% to (I2/IAOL2 × 100%), with time
constant , as in Figure A-2. If  = 100%, then the allowable thermal capacity of the system has been reached.
 (%)
100%
I2 2  100%
I AOL
2  t 
  I I 2 1  e 

 100 %
AOL
t (s)
Figure A-2
A thermal overload protection relay can be designed to model this function, giving tripping times
according to the IEC60255-8 ‘Hot’ and ‘Cold’ curves.
 I2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2  (1) ····· Cold curve
 I  I AOL 
 I2  I 2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2P  (2) ····· Hot curve
 I  I AOL 
where:
 151 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
IP = prior load current.
In fact, the cold curve is simply a special case of the hot curve where prior load current IP = 0, catering for
the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
Figure A-3 shows a typical thermal profile for a system which initially carries normal load current, and is
then subjected to an overload condition until a trip results, before finally cooling to ambient temperature.
() Overload Current

Condition Trip at 100%
100%
Normal Load
Current Condition Cooling Curve
t (s)
Figure A-3
 152 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix B
Signal List
 153 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
No. Signal Name Contents
0 CONSTANT_0 constant 0
1 CONSTANT_1 constant 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48 DIF-A DIF-A element output
49 DIF-B ditto
50 DIF-C ditto
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63 RELAY_BLOCK DIF relay block
64 OC5-A OC5-A element output
65 OC5-B ditto
66 OC5-C ditto
67
68 OCD-A OCD-A element output
69 OCD-B ditto
70 OCD-C ditto
 154 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
71
72 DIFSV-A DIFSV-A element output
73 DIFSV-B ditto
74 DIFSV-C ditto
75
76
77
78
79
81 OC1-B ditto
82 OC1-C ditto
83
85 OC2-B ditto
86 OC2-C ditto
87
89 OC3-B ditto
90 OC3-C ditto
91
93 OC4-B ditto
94 OC4-C ditto
95
96 OC1-A_INST OC1 relay element start
97 OC1-B_INST ditto
98 OC1-C_INST ditto
99
100
101
102
103
104 ICD-A Inrush current detection (Phase A)
105 ICD-B Inrush current detection (Phase B)
106 ICD-C Inrush current detection (Phase C)
107
108 ICLDO-A ICLDO relay (OC relay) element output used in "CLP scheme"
109 ICLDO-B ditto
110 ICLDO-C ditto
111
112 EF1 EF1 relay element output
116 SEF1 SEF1 relay element output
120
121
122
123
124 CBF-A CBF relay element output
125 CBF-B ditto
126 CBF-C ditto
127
128 EF1_INST EF1 relay element start
129
130
131
132 SEF1_INST SEF1 relay element start
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
 155 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
141
142 BCD BCD relay element output
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176 UC1-A UC1 relay element output
177 UC1-B ditto
178 UC1-C ditto
179
180 UC2-A UC2 relay element output
181 UC2-B ditto
182 UC2-C ditto
183
184
185
186
187
188 THM-T Thermal trip relay element output
189 THM-A Thermal alarm relay element output
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200 UCDO-A UCDO relay element output
201 UCDO-B ditto
202 UCDO-C ditto
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
 156 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256 DIF_TRIP DIF trip command
257 DIF-A_TRIP ditto (Phase A)
258 DIF-B_TRIP B
259 DIF-C_TRIP C
260
261
262
263
264 DIFFS_OP Fail safe for DIF trip
265 DIFFS-A_OP ditto
266 DIFFS-B_OP ditto
267 DIFFS-C_OP ditto
268
269
270
271
272 OC1_TRIP OC1 trip command
273 OC1-A_TRIP ditto (Phase A)
274 OC1-B_TRIP B
275 OC1-C_TRIP C
277 OC2-A_TRIP ditto (Phase A)
278 OC2-B_TRIP B
279 OC2-C_TRIP C
 157 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
281 OC3-A TRIP ditto (Phase A)
282 OC3-B TRIP B
283 OC3-C TRIP C
284 OC4 ALARM OC4 alarm command
285 OC4-A ALARM ditto (Phase A)
286 OC4-B ALARM B
287 OC4-C ALARM C
288
289
290
291
292 EF1 TRIP EF1 trip command
293 EF2 TRIP 2
294 EF3 TRIP 3
295 EF4 ALARM 4 alarm command
296
297
298
299
300 SEF1 TRIP SEF1 trip command
301 SEF1-S2 TRIP SEF1 stage2 trip command
302 SEF2 TRIP 2 trip command
303 SEF3 TRIP 3
304 SEF4 ALARM 4 alarm command
305
306
307
308 UC1 TRIP UC1 trip command
309 UC1-A TRIP ditto (Phase A)
310 UC1-B TRIP B
311 UC1-C TRIP C
312 UC2 ALARM UC2 alarm command
313 UC2-A ALARM ditto (Phase A)
314 UC2-B ALARM B
315 UC2-C ALARM C
316
317
318
319
320 THM ALARM Thermal Overload alarm command
321 THM TRIP trip command
322 BCD TRIP Broken Conductor trip command
323
324
325
326
327
328 CBF RETRIP CBF retrip command
329 CBF-A RETRIP ditto (Phase A)
330 CBF-B RETRIP B
331 CBF-C RETRIP C
332 CBF TRIP CBF back trip command
333 CBF-A TRIP ditto (Phase A)
334 CBF-B TRIP B
335 CBF-C TRIP C
336
337
338
339
340 TR1 TRIP TRANSFER TRIP-1
341 INTER TRIP1 INTER TRIP-1
342 TR2 TRIP TRANSFER TRIP-2
343 INTER TRIP2 INTER TRIP-2
344
345
346
347
348 GEN.TRIP General trip command with off-delay timer
349 GEN.TRIP-A ditto (Phase A)
350 GEN.TRIP-B B
 158 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
351 GEN.TRIP-C C
352 GEN.TRIP-N N
353 GEN.ALARM General alarm command
354 GEN.ALARM-A ditto (Phase A)
355 GEN.ALARM-B B
356 GEN.ALARM-C C
357 GEN.ALARM-N N
358
359
360 GEN.TP General trip command without off-delay timer
361 GEN.TP-A ditto (Phase A)
362 GEN.TP-B B
363 GEN.TP-C C
364 GEN.TP-N N
365
366
367
368 CLP_STATE0 Cold Load Protection State
369 CLP_STATE1 ditto
372
373 ICD Inrush current detection (3 phase OR)
374 ICD_BLK-S Inrush current detection (send to remote terminal)
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384 CB_CLOSE CB close condition
385 CB_OPEN CB open condition
386 DS_CLOSE DS close condition
387 DS_OPEN DS open condition
388 I.LINK Interlink signal (CB and DS both closed)
389 43C_ON Differential protection enable
390 LOCAL_TEST LOCAL TESTING SW ON
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416 READY Local terminal ready
417 REM1_READY Terminal 1 ready
418
419 MASTER Being set to master terminal
420 SLAVE Being set to slave terminal
 159 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
421 FG Trigger signal for end-to-end synchronized test
422 REM1_CRC.F CRC fail detection
423 REM1_INT.R Interruption of receciving signal
424 REM1_SP.F SP synchronism fail
425 REM1_SA.F SA synchronism fail
426
427
428
429
430
431
432 REM1_IN_SRV Terminal 1 "in-service"
433 REM1_OFF_SRV Terminal 1 "out-of-service"
434
435
436
437
438 UNREADY1_ALM Terminal 1 communication not ready
439 CFSV1 Terminal 1 CFSV
440 SPSV1 Sampling synchronization with terminal 1 failure signal
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450 COMM1_FAIL Communication with terminal 1 failure signal
451
452 READY1_ALARM Terminal 1 ready
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
 160 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512 BI1_COMMAND Binary input signal BI1
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528 BI1_COM_T Binary input signal BI1
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544 TP1_OP Binary output signal TP1
545 TP2_OP Binary output signal TP2
546 BO1_OP Binary output signal BO1
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
 161 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717 LCD_IND. LCD indication(Virtual LED) command
718 LCD_IND1. LCD indication1(Virtual LED) command
719 LCD_IND2. LCD indication2(Virtual LED) command
720
721
722 TELE_COM_ON IEC103 communication command
723 PROT_COM_ON IEC103 communication command
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
 162 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024 GROUP1_ACTIVE group1 active
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034 LOCAL_OP_ACT local operation active
1035 REMOTE_OP_ACT remote operation active
1036
1037 GEN_TRIP General trip
1038 GEN_PICKUP General start/pick-up
1039 IEC_TESTMODE IEC61870-5-103 testmode
1040 IEC_MDBLK monitor direction blocked
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
 163 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088 COM1-R1 Comm. data receive signal from remote term-1
1089 COM2-R1 ditto
1090 COM3-R1 ditto
1091 COM4-R1 ditto
1092 COM5-R1 ditto
1093
1094
1095
1096 COM1-R1_UF Comm. data receive signal from remote term-1 (unfiltered)
1097 COM2-R1_UF ditto
1101
1102
1103
1104 SUB_COM1-R1 Sub comm. data receive signal from term-1
1105 SUB_COM2-R1 ditto
1109
1110
1111
1112 SUB2_COM1-R1 Sub comm. data2 receive signal from term-1
1113 SUB2_COM2-R1 ditto
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
 164 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266 CT_err_UF CT error(unfiltered)
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284 BI1_COM_UF Binary input signal BI1 (unfiltered)
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
 165 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343 BO_block Binary output block signal
1344 A.M.F.OFF Automatic monitoring function off
1345 RELAY_FAIL Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
1346 RELAY_FAIL-A Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
1347
1348 SUM_err The checksum value of written data checking error
1349
1350 SRAM_err SRAM memory monitoring error
1351 BU-RAM_err BU-RAM memory monitoring error
1352 Data_lost BU-RAM data lost
1353 EEPROM_err EEPROM memory monitoring error
1354 A/D_err A/D accuracy checking error
1355
1356 CT_err CT circuit current monitoring error
1357
1358 DC_err DC supply monitoring error
1359 TC_fail Trip circuit fail
1360 CB_err CB contact monitoring error
1361 TP_COUNT_ALM Trip count alarm
1362 OP_time_ALM Operate time alarm
1363 Sigma_I^y_ALM ΣI^y count alarm
1364
1365
1366 Id_err Differential current monitoring err
1367
1368
1369 DS_err DS contact monitoring err
1370 ROM_data_err The checksum value of written ROM data checking error
1371 Term1_rdy_off Communication ready off
1372 COM1_fail Communication failure
1373 Sync1_fail Sampling synchronization failure
1374 FER_ALM Frame error rate alarm
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
 166 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412 NORM_LED_ON NORMAL LED ON
1413 ALM_LED_ON ALARM LED ON
1414 TRIP_LED_ON TRIP LED ON
1415
1416
1417
1418 TP_LED_RST TRIP LED RESET
1419 KEY-VIEW VIEW key status
1420 KEY-RESET RESET Key status
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425 KEY-ENTER ENTER key status
1426 KEY-END END key status
1427 KEY-CANCEL CANCEL key status
1428
1429
1430 KEY-UP UP key status
1431 KEY-DOWN DOWN key status
1432 KEY-LEFT LEFT key status
1433 KEY-RIGHT RIGHT key status
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448 DEMAND_CLR Demand clear
1449 F.Record_DONE
1450 F.Record_CLR Fault record clear
1451
1452 E.Record_CLR Event record clear
1453 D.Record_CLR Disturbance record clear
1454 CF_count_CLR CF counter clear
1455 Reserved for counter clear
1456 D.REC_FULL Disturbance record full
1457 Reserved for disturbance record status
1460 PC_DIST_TRIG Trigger for disturbance recorder from PC
1461 PLC_data_CHG PLC data change
1462 TP_COUNT_CLR Trips count clear
1463 I^y_COUNT_CLR ΣI^y count clear
1464 Sys.set_change System setting change
1465 Rly.set_change Relay setting change
1466 Grp.set_change Group setting change
1467
1468
1469
1470
 167 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
1536 CB N/O CONT CB normally open contact
1537 CB N/C CONT CB normally close contact
1538 DS N/O CONT DS normally open contact
1539 DS N/C CONT DS normally close contact
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547 EXT CB CLOSE External CB close command
1548 TC FAIL Trip circuit supervision command
1549
1550
1551 IND.RESET Indication reset command
1552 PROT BLOCK Protection block command
1553 DIF BLOCK DIF trip block command
1554 TR1 BLOCK Transfer trip1 block command
1555 TR2 BLOCK Transfer trip2 block command
1556 OC1 BLOCK OC1 trip block command
1557 OC2 BLOCK 2
1558 OC3 BLOCK 3
1559 OC4 BLOCK 4
1560 EF1 BLOCK EF1 trip block command
1561 EF2 BLOCK 2
1562 EF3 BLOCK 3
1563 EF4 BLOCK 4
1564 SEF1 BLOCK SEF1 trip block command
1565 SEF2 BLOCK 2
1566 SEF3 BLOCK 3
1567 SEF4 BLOCK 4
1568 UC1 BLOCK UC1 trip block command
1569 UC2 BLOCK 2
1570 CBF BLOCK CBF protection block command
1571
1572 THM BLOCK Thermal Overload trip block command
1573 THMA BLOCK Thermal Overload alarm block command
1574 BCD BLOCK Broken conductor trip block command
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584 DIF-A FS Fail safe command for DIF-A trip
1585 DIF-B FS Fail safe command for DIF-B trip
1586 DIF-C FS Fail safe command for DIF-C trip
1587 R.DATA ZERO Remote term. data zero-ampere control command
1588 EXT TRIP-A External trip command for counter initiation
1589 EXT TRIP-B ditto
1590 EXT TRIP-C ditto
1591 EXT TRIP ditto
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596 CBF INIT-A CBF initiation command (A-Phase)
1597 CBF INIT-B CBF initiation command (B-Phase)
1598 CBF INIT-C CBF initiation command (C-Phase)
1599 CBF INIT CBF initiation command
1600 UC1-A DO UC1-A trip drop-off command
1601 UC1-B DO UC1-B trip drop-off command
1602 UC1-C DO UC1-C trip drop-off command
1603
1604 UC2-A DO UC2-A trip drop-off command
1605 UC2-B DO UC2-B trip drop-off command
1606 UC2-C DO UC2-C trip drop-off command
 168 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620 OC1_INST_TP OC1 instantly trip command
1624 EF1_INST_TP EF1 instantly trip command
1628 SEF1_INST_TP SEF1 instantly trip command
1632 UC1_INST_TP UC1 instantly trip command
1633 UC2_INST_TP UC2 instantly trip command
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648 TR1-R1 Transfer trip-1 command from remote term
1649 TR2-R1 Transfer trip-2 command from remote term
1650 L.TEST-R1 Local testing command from remote term
1651 I.LINK-R1 CB & DS close command from remote term (use for OTD)
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664 TP-A_DELAY Trip command off-delay timer setting
1665 TP-B_DELAY ditto
1666 TP-C_DELAY ditto
1667 TP-N_DELAY ditto
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672 TP_DELAY Trip command off-delay timer setting
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
 169 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
1678
1679
1680 DIF-A_IC_BLK DIF-A blocked command by inrush current
1681 DIF-B_IC_BLK DIF-B blocked command by inrush current
1682 DIF-C_IC_BLK DIF-C blocked command by inrush current
1683 OC_IC_BLK OC/EF/SEF blocked command by inrush current
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
 170 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048 COM1-S Communication on/off data send command
2049 COM2-S ditto
2050 COM3-S ditto
2051 COM4-S ditto
2052 COM5-S ditto
2053
2054
2055
2056 SUB_COM1-S Sub communication on/off data send command
2057 SUB_COM2-S ditto
2058 SUB_COM3-S ditto
2059 SUB_COM4-S ditto (reserved)
2060 SUB_COM5-S ditto (reserved)
2061
2062
2063
2064 SUB2_COM1-S Sub communication on/off data 2 send command
2065 SUB2_COM2-S ditto
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
 171 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560 TP1 Binary output signal of TP1
2561 TP2 TP2
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
 172 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624 F.RECORD1 Fault record stored command 1
2625 F.RECORD2 2
2626 F.RECORD3 3
2627 F.RECORD4 4
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632 D.RECORD1 Disturbance record stored command 1
2633 D.RECORD2 2
2634 D.RECORD3 3
2635 D.RECORD4 4
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640 SET.GROUP1 Active setting group changed command (Change to group1)
 173 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
2641 SET.GROUP2 2
2642 SET.GROUP3 3
2643 SET.GROUP4 4
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648 SYNC CLOCK Clock synchronized command
2649
2650
2651
2652 ALARM1 Alarm-1 indicated command
2653 ALARM2 2
2654 ALARM3 3
2655 ALARM4 4
2656 CON TPMD1 User configurable trip mode in fault record
2657 CON TPMD2 ditto
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685 TEL COM RECV Teleprotection inactivate command received
2686 PROT COM RECV protection inactivate command received
2687
2688 TPLED RST RCV TRIP LED RESET command received
2689 ALMLED RST RCV ALARM LED RESET command received
2690 TPALM RST RCV TRIP/ALARM LED RESET command received
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
 174 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876 TEMP001
2877 TEMP002
2878 TEMP003
2879 TEMP004
2880 TEMP005
2881 TEMP006
2882 TEMP007
2883 TEMP008
2884 TEMP009
2885 TEMP010
2886 TEMP011
2887 TEMP012
2888 TEMP013
2889 TEMP014
2890 TEMP015
2891 TEMP016
2892 TEMP017
2893 TEMP018
2894 TEMP019
2895 TEMP020
2896 TEMP021
2897 TEMP022
2898 TEMP023
2899 TEMP024
2900 TEMP025
2901 TEMP026
2902 TEMP027
2903 TEMP028
2904 TEMP029
2905 TEMP030
2906 TEMP031
2907 TEMP032
2908 TEMP033
2909 TEMP034
2910 TEMP035
 175 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
2911 TEMP096
2912 TEMP097
2913 TEMP098
2914 TEMP099
2915 TEMP100
2916 TEMP101
2917 TEMP102
2918 TEMP103
2919 TEMP104
2920 TEMP105
2921 TEMP106
2922 TEMP107
2923 TEMP108
2924 TEMP109
2925 TEMP110
2926 TEMP111
2927 TEMP112
2928 TEMP113
2929 TEMP114
2930 TEMP115
2931 TEMP116
2932 TEMP117
2933 TEMP118
2934 TEMP119
2935 TEMP120
2936 TEMP121
2937 TEMP122
2938 TEMP123
2939 TEMP124
2940 TEMP125
2941 TEMP126
2942 TEMP127
2943 TEMP128
2944 TEMP129
2945 TEMP130
2946 TEMP131
2947 TEMP132
2948 TEMP133
2949 TEMP134
2950 TEMP135
2951 TEMP136
2952 TEMP137
2953 TEMP138
2954 TEMP139
2955 TEMP140
2956 TEMP141
2957 TEMP142
2958 TEMP143
2959 TEMP144
2960 TEMP145
2961 TEMP146
2962 TEMP147
2963 TEMP148
2964 TEMP149
2965 TEMP150
2966 TEMP151
2967 TEMP152
2968 TEMP153
2969 TEMP154
2970 TEMP155
2971 TEMP156
2972 TEMP157
2973 TEMP158
2974 TEMP159
2975 TEMP160
2976 TEMP161
2977 TEMP162
2978 TEMP163
2979 TEMP164
2980 TEMP165
 176 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
2981 TEMP166
2982 TEMP167
2983 TEMP168
2984 TEMP169
2985 TEMP170
2986 TEMP171
2987 TEMP172
2988 TEMP173
2989 TEMP174
2990 TEMP175
2991 TEMP176
2992 TEMP177
2993 TEMP178
2994 TEMP179
2995 TEMP180
2996 TEMP181
2997 TEMP182
2998 TEMP183
2999 TEMP184
3000 TEMP185
3001 TEMP186
3002 TEMP187
3003 TEMP188
3004 TEMP189
3005 TEMP190
3006 TEMP191
3007 TEMP192
3008 TEMP193
3009 TEMP194
3010 TEMP195
3011 TEMP196
3012 TEMP197
3013 TEMP198
3014 TEMP199
3015 TEMP200
3016 TEMP201
3017 TEMP202
3018 TEMP203
3019 TEMP204
3020 TEMP205
3021 TEMP206
3022 TEMP207
3023 TEMP208
3024 TEMP209
3025 TEMP210
3026 TEMP211
3027 TEMP212
3028 TEMP213
3029 TEMP214
3030 TEMP215
3031 TEMP216
3032 TEMP217
3033 TEMP218
3034 TEMP219
3035 TEMP220
3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
 177 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal list
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256
 178 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix C
Binary Output Default Setting List
 179 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Binary Output Default Setting List
Setting range Model

Setting
№ 100, 110, 120, 400, 410, 420
BO Logic Reset Functions
Logic BOTD Functions Logic BOTD Functions
1 BO1 OR / AND Ins/Dl/Dw/Lat In #1 0-3071 OR Del In #1 348 GEN.TRIP In #1
In #2 0-3071 In #2 0 In #2
In #3 0-3071 In #3 0 In #3
In #4 0-3071 In #4 0 In #4
Timer 0.00 - 10.00 0.20
2 BO2 OR / AND Ins/Dl/Dw/Lat In #1 0-3071 OR Del In #1 348 GEN.TRIP In #1
In #2 0-3071 In #2 0 In #2
In #3 0-3071 In #3 0 In #3
In #4 0-3071 In #4 0 In #4
Timer 0.00 - 10.00 0.20
3 BO3 OR / AND Ins/Dl/Dw/Lat In #1 0-3071 OR Del In #1 256 DIF_TRIP In #1
In #2 0-3071 In #2 0 In #2
In #3 0-3071 In #3 0 In #3
In #4 0-3071 In #4 0 In #4
Timer 0.00 - 10.00 0.20
4 BO4 OR / AND Ins/Dl/Dw/Lat In #1 0-3071 OR Del In #1 256 DIF_TRIP In #1
In #2 0-3071 In #2 0 In #2
In #3 0-3071 In #3 0 In #3
In #4 0-3071 In #4 0 In #4
Timer 0.00 - 10.00 0.20
5 BO5 OR / AND Ins/Dl/Dw/Lat In #1 0-3071 OR Del In #1 1346 RELAY_FAIL-A In #1
In #2 0-3071 In #2 450 COMM1_FAIL In #2
In #3 0-3071 In #3 440 SPSV1 In #3
In #4 0-3071 In #4 0 In #4
Timer 0.00 - 10.00 0.20
 180 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix D
Details of Relay Menu
 181 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
MENU
Record
Status
Set. (view)
Set. (change)
Test
/1 Record
F. record
E. record
D. record
Counter
/2 F.record /3 F.record /4 F.record #1

Display 16/Jul/2002
Clear #1 16/Jul/2002
Refer to Section 18:13:57.031
4.2.3.1.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 E.record /3 E.record
Display
Clear 16/Jul/2002 480
Refer to Section DIF trip On
4.2.3.2.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 D.record /3 D.record
Display
Clear #1 16/Jul/2002
Refer to Section 18:13:57.401
4.2.3.3.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1 b-1
 182 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
a-1 b-1
/2 Counter /3 Counter
Display Trips *****
Clear Trips TripsA *****
Clear Trips A TripsB *****
Clear Trips B TripsC *****
Clear Trips C  I^yA ******E6
Clear  I^yA  I^yB ******E6
Clear  I^yB  I^yC ******E6
Clear  I^yC ARCs ******
Clear CF
Refer to Section Clear Trips?
4.2.3.4. END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips A?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips B?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips C?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear  I^yA?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear  I^yB?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear  I^yC?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear CF?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1
 183 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
a-1
/1 Status /2 Metering /3 Current

Metering Current la **.** kA
Binary I/O Demand
Relay element /3 Demand
/2 Binary I/O lamax **.** kA
Time sync.
IP [0000 0000]
Clock adjust.
Clear max?
LCD contrast /2 Ry element
Refer to Section 4.2.4.
END=Y CANCEL=N
DIF [000 ]
/2 Time sync.
*BI : Act.
/2 12/Nov/2002
22:56:19 LOC
/2 LCD contrast
/1 Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P Refer to Section 4.2.5
LED
/2 Version GRL150-100A-10
Relay type -10
Serial No.
Software 
PLC data 
IEC103 data GS1PM1-01-*
PLCDefault10
/2 Description
Plant name
Description 
a-1, b-2
 184 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
a-1 b-2
/2 Comms /3 Addr./Param.
Addr./Param. HDLC 1
Switch
/3 Switch
/2 Record /3 E.record /4 Signal no.

E.record Signal no. BITRN 100
D.record Event name
Counter /4 Event name
/3 D.record /4 Time/starter
Time/starter Time 2.0s
Scheme sw /4 Scheme sw
Binary sig.
Signal name
/4 Binary sig.
SIG1 
/4 Signal name
/3 Counter /4 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Threshold
/4 Threshold
TCALM 10000
/2 Status /3 Metering
Metering
Time sync.
Time zone /3 Time sync.
/2 Act. gp. =* /3 Time sync.

Common
Group1
Group2
Group3
Group4
a-1 b-2 c-1
 185 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
a-1 b-2 c-1
/3 Common
/3 Group1
Parameter
Telecomm.
Trip
/4 Parameter 
Line name 
CT ratio
/5 CT ratio
CT 400
/4 Telecomm. /5 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Threshold set
/5 Threshold
M.RL 20.0%
/4 Trip
Scheme sw
Prot.element
/6 Application
/5 Scheme sw
Application
/6 DIF
DIF
OC
EF /6 OC
SEF
Misc.
CLP/ICD /6 EF
/6 SEF
/6 Misc.
/6 CLP/ICD
a-1 b-2 C-1 d-1 e-1
 186 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
a-1 b-2 c-1 d-1 e-1
/5 Prot.element /6 DIF
DIF DIFI1 1.00A
OC
/6 OC
EF
OC1 1.00A
SEF
Misc. /6 EF
CLP/ICD EF1 0.30A
/6 SEF
SE1 0/010A
/3 Group2 /6 Misc.
Parameter UC1 0.40A
/3 Group4 /6 CLP/ICD
Parameter OC1 2.00A
/2 Binary I/P /3 BI1 /4 Timers

BI1 Timers BI1PUD 0.00s
Functions
BI8 /4 Functions
Alarm1 Text /3 BI8
Timers
Alarm4 Text Functions
/2 Binary O/P 

Alarm Text
BO1 AND, D
1, 10, 29, 0
BO5 OR , L
1, 2, 3, 4
TBO1 0.20s
TBO5 0.20s
/2 LED /3 LED
LED LED1 AND, I /4 LED1
Virtual LED BIT1 I,O
/3 Virtual LED
IND1
a-1 b-2
IND2
 187 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
a-1
/1 Set.(change)
Password
Description : Password trap
Comms Password [_ ]
Record 1234567890
Status : Confirmation trap
Protection Change settings?
Binary I/P ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
Binary O/P
LED Input [_ ] Retype [_ ]
/2 Password 1234567890 1234567890
Setting
Input [_ ] Retype [_ ]
Test 1234567890 1234567890
Refer to Section 4.2.6.2.
/2 Description _
Plant name ABCDEFG
Description
_
Refer to Section
4.2.6.3. ABCDEFG
/2 Comms /3 Addr./Param.
Addr./Param.
Switch
/3 Switch
Refer to Section
4.2.6.4.
/2 Record /3 E.record
E.record
D.record BITRN
Counter *** _
Refer to Section EV1 /4 Time/starter
4.2.6.5. ****
/3 D.record /4 Scheme sw
Time/starter
Scheme sw /4 Binary sig.
Binary sig.
/3 Counter /4 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Threshold set
/4 Threshold set
a-1 b-3
 188 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
a-1 b-3
/2 Status /3 Metering
Metering
Time sync.
/3 Time sync.
Time zone
Refer to Section
4.2.6.6.
/3 Time zone
/2 Protection
Change act. gp.
Change set. Refer to Section
4.2.6.7.
Copy gp.
/3 Change act.
gp.
/3 Act gp.=1
Common
Group1
Group2
Group3
Group4
/4 Common
/4 Group1
Parameter
Telecomm.
TRIP
/5 Parameter _
Line name ABCDEFG
CT ratio
/6 CT ratio
/5 Telecomm. /6 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Threshold set
/6 Threshold
a-1 b-3 c-2 d-2 e-2
 189 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
a-1 b-3 c-2 d-2 e-2
/5 Trip
Scheme sw
Prot.element
/6 Scheme sw /7 Application
Application
DIF
OC /7 DIF
EF
SEF
/7 OC
Misc.
CLP/ICD
/7 EF
/7 SEF
/7 Misc.
/7 CLP/ICD
/6 Prot.element /7 DIF
DIF
OC /7 OC
EF
SEF
Misc. /7 EF
CLP/ICD
/7 SEF
/7 Misc.
/7 CLP/ICD
a-1 b-3 c-2 d-2
 190 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
a-1 b-3 c-2 d-2
/4 Group2
Parameter
/4 Group4
Parameter
/3 Copy A to B
A _
B _
/2 Binary I/P /3 BI1 /4 Timers

BI1 Timers
BI2 Functions
: /4 Functions
BI8 /3 BI8
Alarm1 Text Timers
: Functions
Alarm4 Text
Refer to Section 4.2.6.8. 
ABCDEFG
Alarm Text
/2 Binary O/P /3 BO1 /4 Logic/Reset

BO1 Logic/Reset
Functions
/4 Functions
BO5
Refer to Section /3 BO5
4.2.6.9. Logic/Reset
Functions
/2 LED
LED
Refer to Section
Virtual LED 4.2.6.10.
/3 LED /4 LED1 /5 Logic/Reset

LED1 Logic/Reset
Functions
/5 Functions
LED3
/4 LED3
Logic/Reset
a-1, c-3 Functions
 191 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
a-1 b-2 C-3
/3 Virtual LED /4 IND1 /5 Reset

IND1 Reset
IND2 Functions
/5 Functions
/4 IND2
Reset
Functions
/1 Test /2 Switch
Switch
Binary O/P A.M.F. 1 _
Logic circuit Off/On
Sim. fault CLPTST 0
Refer to Section 4.2.7. Off/S0/S3
COM1 0
Off/On
SCOM12 0
Off/On
/2 Binary O/P Operate?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
TP1 0 _
Disable/Enable
FAIL 0
Disable/Enable
/2 Logic
circuit
TermA
1 _
TermB
48 _
 192 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
LCD AND BUTTON OPERATION INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
MODE
1. PRESS ARROW KEY TO MOVE TO EACH DISPLAYED
ITEMS
NORMAL
2. PRESS "END" KEY TO BACK TO PREVIOUS SCREEN
(DISPLAY OFF)
1=RECORD
PRESS ANY
BUTTON
EXCEPT FOR MENU 1=FAULT RECORD
VIEW "VIEW" AND ( DISPLAY ON )
"RESET"
2=EVENT RECORD
3=DISTURBANCE RECORD
METERING 1
( DISPLAY ON ) 4=COUNTER
2=STATUS
VIEW RESET
1=METERING
2=BINARY INPUT&OUPUT
METERING 11 AUTO- 3=RELAY ELELMENT

( DISPLAY ON )
MODE 1 4=TIME SYNC SOURCE
TRIP OUTPUT 5=CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

ISSUED !
VIEW RESET
TRIP 3=SETTING
( LED ON ) (VIEW)
1=RELAY VERSION
2=DESCRIPTION
LATEST FAULT * AUTO-
( DISPLAY ON ) 3=COMMUNICATION
MODE 2
4=RECORD
RELAY
FAILED ! 5=STATUS
VIEW RESET
ALARM 6=PROTECTION
( LED ON )
7=BINARY INPUT
8=BINARY OUTPUT
AUTO SUPERVISON *
9=LED
( DISPLAY ON )
*. "LATEST FAULT" AND "AUTO
SUPERVISION" SCREEN IS 4=SETTING
DISPLAYED ONLY IF DATA (CHANGE) Same as SETTING (VIEW) menu
IS STORED
VIEW RESET
5=TEST
1=SWITCH
2=BINARY OUTPUT
8=LOGIC CIRCUIT
9=SIM. FAULT
 193 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 194 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix E
Case Outline
 195 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
GRL150
I N S ERV ICE VIEW

TRIP
ALARM
258
RE SET
A B 0V
CAN
CEL ENTER
END
15.6 185.2 32
104
Side view
Front view
4 holes-5.5
4 holes-4.5
TB4 OPT1 RX
TX
TB1 TB3 TB3
TB1
TB2 TB2
24 9
239
RX RX
TX TX
E E
Rear view for 56

Rear view for
Dual RS485 Model Fibre optic Model 102
TB4
A1
B1
A3
B3 Note (): T X and R X (LC co nnector) are Panel cut-out
provided o nly fo r mode l 4 00 series.
TB3
TB1
A1 B1 Ter mina l Ap plicatio n
1 2
TB3: A1 – A3 R S48 5 I/F (C H1 ) fo r R SM
3 4
5 6 TB4 R S48 5 I/F (C H2 ) fo r IEC 60 87 0-5- 103
7 8 OPT1 Fi bre op tic fo r IEC 60 87 0-5 -103
TB2
A1 B1
TB1,TB2,TB3 : S crew te rmin al

(M3 .5 Ri ng )
TB4: Scre w te rmi na l for Du al
RS4 85 Mo de l
A10 B10 OPT1: ST c onn ecto r fo r Fi bre
opti c Mod el
A18 B1 8
Terminal block
Case Outline of GRL150
 196 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
External 20kV Isolation Transformer EB-110 (Option)

4 ho le s fo r M 6 screw (fo r m oun ting )
1 52.4
1 70
19 0
1 8.8
10 6 62
10
20 7
M4 screw M 5 screw
U
V
E
130
TB 2
TB1 v u
Outline & Dimensions
TB2 TB1
U u Pilot wire side
(High-voltage side)
Relay side V v
E
External Connections
 197 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 198 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix F
Typical External Connections
 199 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
GRL150 – 100 / 400
A B C TB1-
TB3-
1
A4
2 Ia
3 B4
TP1
CT 4 Ib A5
5 B5
6 Ic
A6
B6
TP2
A7
FRAME EARTH B7
A8
BO1 B8
A9
BO2 B9
A10
BO3 B10
A11
BO4 B11
A12
B12
BO5 A13
B13
(P)
TB2-
A1 B14
BI1 COMMAND BI1
B1 A14
FAIL
BI2 COMMAND A2 B15
B2 BI2
BI3 COMMAND A3
BI3
B3
BI4 COMMAND A4
B4 BI4
TB3-A16
A5 A17 Pilot wire Interface
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
A6 For telecommunication
BI6 COMMAND BI6
B6 TX
A7 Optical Interface (*2)
BI7 COMMAND BI7 RX
B7
A8
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8
(N) TB3-A2
COM1-A
A1
RELAY FAIL. COM1-B
RS485 I/F (CH1) for RSM, IEC60870-5-103
≥1
DD FAIL. A3
COM1-0V
TB2- A9 +5Vdc
DC (+)
SUPPLY DC-DC
(-) B9 TB4-A2
0V COM2-A
B2
A10 A1
COM2-B
(1) B10 B1 RS485 I/F (CH2) for IEC60870-5-103
(Dual RS485 model only: option)
FRAME EARTH A3
COM2-0V
E B3
CASE EARTH
TX Fibre optic I/F for IEC60870-5-103

OPT1
RX (Fibre optic model only: option)
TB3-B1
B2 IRIG (*3)
(*1)This connection is connected by wire link before

shipment.
(*2)Model 100 is not provided with Optical interface.
(*3)Model 100 is not provided with IRIG port.
 200 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
GRL150 – 110 / 410
A B C TB1-
TB3-
1
A4
2 Ia
3 B4
TP1
CT 4 Ib A5
5 B5
6 Ic
7 A6
8 Ie B6
TP2
A7
FRAME EARTH B7
A8
BO1 B8
A9
BO2 B9
A10
BO3 B10
A11
BO4 B11
A12
B12
BO5 A13
(P) B13
TB2-
A1
BI1 COMMAND BI1
B1
B14
BI2 COMMAND A2
B2 BI2 FAIL A14
A3 B15
BI3 COMMAND BI3
B3
BI4 COMMAND A4
B4 BI4
A5
BI5 COMMAND BI5 TB3-A16
B5
BI6 COMMAND BI6
B6
For telecommunication
BI7 COMMAND A7
BI7 TX
B7
Optical Interface (*2)
A8 RX
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8
(N)
TB3-A2
COM1-A
RELAY FAIL. A1
≥1 COM1-B
DD FAIL.
COM1-0V A3
TB2- A9 +5Vdc
DC (+)
SUPPLY DC-DC
(-) B9
0V
TB4-A2
COM2-A
B2
A10
B10 A1
(1) COM2-B
FRAME EARTH B1 RS485 I/F (CH2) for IEC60870-5-103
E A3
CASE EARTH COM2-0V
B3

OPT1
TB3-B1
B2 IRIG (*3)

shipment.
 201 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
GRL150 – 120 / 420
A B C TB1-
TB3-
1
A4
2 Ia
3 B4
TP1
CT 4 Ib A5
5 B5
6 Ic
A6
Core balance 7
8 Ise B6
CT TP2
A7
FRAME EARTH B7
A8
BO1 B8
A9
BO2 B9
A10
BO3 B10
A11
BO4 B11
A12
B12
BO5 A13
B13
(P)
TB2-
A1 B14
BI1 COMMAND BI1
B1 A14
FAIL
BI2 COMMAND A2 B15
B2 BI2
BI3 COMMAND A3
BI3
B3
BI4 COMMAND A4
B4 BI4
TB3-A16
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
BI6 COMMAND A6 For telecommunication
B6 BI6
TX
BI7 COMMAND A7 Optical Interface (*2)
BI7 RX
B7
A8
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8
(N) TB3-A2
COM1-A
RELAY FAIL. A1
≥1 COM1-B
DD FAIL.
A3
TB2- A9 +5Vdc COM1-0V
DC (+)
SUPPLY DC-DC
(-) B9
0V
TB4-A2
COM2-A
A10 B2
(1) B10 A1
COM2-B
FRAME EARTH B1 RS485 I/F (CH1) for IEC60870-5-103
E A3
CASE EARTH COM2-0V
B3

OPT1
TB3-B1
B2 IRIG (*3)

shipment.
 202 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix G
Relay Setting Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Line parameter
3. Binary output setting
4. Relay setting
5. Disturbance record signal setting
6. LED setting
 203 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Relay Setting Sheets
1. Relay Identification Date:

Relay type Serial Number
Frequency CT rating
dc supply voltage
Password
Active setting group
2. Transmission line parameters

CT ratio DIF: OC: EF: SEF:
3. Binary output setting

Model 100, 110, 120, 400, 410, 420
Setting range Default Setting
Setting
BO Logic Reset Functions 110
Logic BOTD Functions Logic BOTD Functions
BO1 OR / AND Ins/Dl/Dw /Lat In #1 0-500 OR Del In #1 348 GEN.TRIP In #1
In #2 0-500 In #2 0 In #2
In #3 0-500 In #3 0 In #3
In #4 0-500 In #4 0 In #4
Timer 0.00 - 10.00 0.20
BO2 OR / AND Ins/Dl/Dw /Lat In #1 0-500 OR Del In #1 348 GEN.TRIP In #1
In #2 0-500 In #2 0 In #2
In #3 0-500 In #3 0 In #3
In #4 0-500 In #4 0 In #4
Timer 0.00 - 10.00 0.20
BO3 OR / AND Ins/Dl/Dw /Lat In #1 0-500 OR Del In #1 256 DIF_TRIP In #1
In #2 0-500 In #2 0 In #2
In #3 0-500 In #3 0 In #3
In #4 0-500 In #4 0 In #4
Timer 0.00 - 10.00 0.20
BO4 OR / AND Ins/Dl/Dw /Lat In #1 0-500 OR Del In #1 256 DIF_TRIP In #1
In #2 0-500 In #2 0 In #2
In #3 0-500 In #3 0 In #3
In #4 0-500 In #4 0 In #4
Timer 0.00 - 10.00 0.20
BO5 OR / AND Ins/Dl/Dw /Lat In #1 0-500 OR Del In #1 1346 RELAY_FAIL-A In #1
In #2 0-500 In #2 450 COMM1_FAIL In #2
In #3 0-500 In #3 440 SPSV1 In #3
In #4 0-500 In #4 0 In #4
Timer 0.00 - 10.00 0.20
 204 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
4. Default setting
Setting 1
Contents Default Setting of Relay Series(5A rating / 1A rating)
Range
No. Name Units Model1 Model2 User
5A rating 1A rating 100 110 120 400 410 420 Setting
1 Active gp. 1-4 -- Active group 1
2 Common CTSVEN Off / ALM&BLK / ALM -- AC input imbalance Super Visor Enable ALM
3 IDSVEN Off / ALM&BLK / ALM -- Id monitoring control ALM
4 Parame Line name Specified by user -- Line name no-name
5 ters CT 1 - 20000 -- CT ratio 400
6 EFCT 1 - 20000 -- SEF CT ratio 400
7 Telecom. SP.SYN. Master / Slave -- SP synchronization setting Master
8 COM.I/F PW / OPT -- Communication inter-face mode -- OPT
9 RL-MODE Auto / Manual -- Adjusting mode of the receiving level Auto
10 M.RL 1.0 - 100.0 % The receiving level value in manually adjusting mode 20.0
11 Appl. MOC1 D / IEC / IEEE / US / C -- OC1 Delay Type (if OC1EN=On) DT
12 MEF1 D / IEC / IEEE / US / C -- EF1 Delay Type (if EF1EN=On) -- D -- -- D --
13 MSE1 D / IEC / IEEE / US / C -- SEF1 Delay Type (if SE1EN=On) -- D -- D
14 OTD Off / On -- The function of open terminal detection use or not Off
15 DIF DIFEN Off / On -- DIF Enable On
16 DIF-FS Off / OC / OCD / Both -- DIF Fail Safe Enable Off
17 OC OC1EN Off / On -- OC1 Enable On
18 MOC1C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI -- OC1 IEC Inverse Curve Type (if MOC1=IEC) NI
19 MOC1C-IEEE MI / VI / EI -- OC1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type (if MOC1=IEEE) MI
20 MOC1C-US CO2 / CO8 -- OC1 US Inverse Curve Type (if MOC1=US) CO2
21 OC1R DEF / DEP -- OC1 Reset Characteristic (if MOCI=IEEE,orUS) DEF
22 OC2EN Off / On -- OC2 Enable Off
25 EF EF1EN Off / On -- EF1 Enable -- On -- -- On --
26 MEF1C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI -- EF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type (if MEF1=IEC) -- NI -- -- NI --
27 MEF1C-IEEE MI / VI / EI -- EF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type (if MEF1=IEEE) -- MI -- -- MI --
28 MEF1C-US CO2 / CO8 -- EF1 US Inverse Curve Type (if MEF1=US) -- CO2 -- -- CO2 --
29 EF1R DEF / DEP -- EF1 Reset Characteristic (if MEFI=IEEE,orUS) -- DEF -- -- DEF --
30 EF2EN Off / On -- EF2 Enable -- Off -- -- Off --
33 SEF SE1EN Off / On -- SEF1 Enable -- On -- On
34 MSE1C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI -- SEF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type (if MSE1=IEC) -- NI -- NI
35 MSE1C-IEEE MI / VI / EI -- SEF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type (if MSE1=IEEE) -- MI -- MI
36 MSE1C-US CO2 / CO8 -- SEF1 US Inverse Curve Type (if MSE1=US) -- CO2 -- CO2
37 SE1R DEF / DEP -- SEF1 Reset Characteristic (if MSEI=IEEE,orUS) -- DEF -- DEF
37 SE1S2 Off / On -- SEF1 Stage 2 Timer Enable (if MSE1EN=On) -- Off -- Off
38 SE2EN Off / On -- SEF2 Enable -- Off -- Off
41 UC UC1EN Off / On -- UC1 Enable Off
42 UC2EN Off / On -- UC2 Enable Off
43 Thermal THMEN Off / On -- Thermal OL Enable Off
44 THMAEN Off / On -- Thermal Alarm Enable Off
45 BCD BCDEN Off / On -- Broken Conductor Enable Off
46 CBF BTC Off / On -- Back-trip control Off
47 RTC Off / DIR / OC -- Re-trip control Off
48 Transfer TTSW1 Off / Trip / BO -- Transfer trip Enable(CH1) Off
49 TTSW2 Off / Trip / BO -- Transfer trip Enable(CH2) Off
50 CLP/ICD CLEN Off / On -- Cold Load Protection Enable Off
51 CLDOEN Off / On -- Cold Load drop-off Enable Off
52 DIF-ICD NA / BLK -- DIF trip blocked or not by inrush current detection NA
53 OC-ICD NA / BLK -- OC/EF/SEF trip blocked or not by inrush current detection NA
54 DIF DIFI1 0.50 - 10.00 0.10 - 2.00 A DIF1 Threshold setting (if DIFEN=On) 5.00 / 1.00
55 DIFI2 1.0 - 120.0 0.2 - 24.0 A DIF2 Threshold setting (if DIFEN=On) 15.0 / 3.0
56 DIFSV 50 - 100 % Minimum operating current of DIFSV 50
57 TIDSV 0 - 60 s Id err detected timer 10
58 OC OC1 0.1 - 25.0 0.02 - 5.00 A OC1 Threshold setting (if OC1EN=On) 5.0 / 1.00
59 TOC1 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 Definite time setting (if MOC1=DT) 1.00
60 TOC1M 0.010 - 1.500 -- OC1 Time multiplier setting (if MOC1=IEC,IEEE,US) 1.000
61 TOC1R 0.0 - 300.0 s OC1 Definite time reset delay (if OC1R =DEF) 0.0
62 TOC1RM 0.010 - 1.500 -- OC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier (if OC1R=DEP) 1.000
63 OC2 0.1 - 25.0 0.02 - 5.00 A OC2 Threshold setting (if OC2EN=On) 25.0 / 5.00
64 TOC2 0.00 - 300.00 s OC2 Definite time setting (if MOC2=DT) 1.00
66 TOC3 0.00 - 300.00 s OC3 Definite time setting (if OC3EN=On) 1.00
68 TOC4 0.00 - 300.00 s OC4 Definite time setting (if OC4EN=On) 1.00
69 OC5 0.1 - 250.0 0.02 - 50.00 A OC5 Threshold setting 2.5 / 0.50
70 OCD 0.4 (Fixed) 0.08 (Fixed) A OCD Threshold setting --
71 OC1-k 0.00 - 300.00 -- Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1. 0.00
72 OC1-α 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto 0.00
73 OC1-C 0.000 - 5.000 -- ditto 0.000
74 OC1-kr 0.00 - 300.00 -- ditto 0.00
75 OC1-β 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto 0.00
 205 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Contents Default Setting of Relay Series(5A rating / 1A rating)

Range
No. Name Units Model1 Model2 User
76 EF EF1 0.1 - 25.0 0.02 - 5.00 A EF1 Threshold setting (if EF1EN=On) -- 1.5 / 0.30 -- -- 1.5 / 0.30 --
77 TEF1 0.00 - 300.00 s EF1 Definite time setting. (if MEF1=DT) -- 1.00 -- -- 1.00 --
78 TEF1M 0.010 - 1.500 -- EF1 Time multiplier setting (if MEF1=IEC,IEEE,US) -- 1.000 -- -- 1.000 --
79 TEF1R 0.0 - 300.0 s EF1 Definite time reset delay (if EF1R =DEF) -- 0.0 -- -- 0.0 --
80 TEF1RM 0.010 - 1.500 -- EF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier (if EF1R=DEP) -- 1.000 -- -- 1.000 --
81 EF2 0.1 - 25.0 0.02 - 5.00 A EF2 Threshold setting (if EF2EN=On) -- 15.0 / 3.00 -- -- 15.0 / 3.00 --
82 TEF2 0.00 - 300.00 s EF2 Definite time setting.(if MEF2=DT) -- 1.00 -- -- 1.00 --
84 TEF3 0.00 - 300.00 s EF3 Definite time setting.(if EF3EN=On) -- 1.00 -- -- 1.00 --
86 TEF4 0.00 - 300.00 s EF4 Definite time setting.(if EF4EN=On) -- 1.00 -- -- 1.00 --
87 EF1-k 0.00 - 300.00 -- Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1. -- 0.00 -- -- 0.00 --
88 EF1-α 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto -- 0.00 -- -- 0.00 --
89 EF1-C 0.000 - 5.000 -- ditto -- 0.000 -- -- 0.000 --
90 EF1-kr 0.00 - 300.00 -- ditto -- 0.00 -- -- 0.00 --
91 EF1-β 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto -- 0.00 -- -- 0.00 --
92 SEF SE1 0.01 - 1.00 0.002 - 0.200 A SEF1 Threshold setting (if SE1EN=On) -- 0.05 / 0.010 -- 0.05 / 0.010
93 TSE1 0.00 - 300.00 s SEF1 Definite time setting.(if MSE1=DT) -- 1.00 -- 1.00
94 TSE1M 0.010 - 1.500 -- SEF1 Time multiplier setting (if MSE1=IEC,IEEE,US) -- 1.000 -- 1.000
95 TSE1R 0.0 - 300.0 s SEF1 Definite time reset delay (if SE1R =DEF) -- 0.0 -- 0.0
96 TSE1RM 0.010 - 1.500 -- SEF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier (if SE1R=DEP) -- 1.000 -- 1.000
96 TS1S2 0.00-300.00 s SEF1 Stage 2 definite timer settings (if SE1EN=On and SE1S2=On) -- 1.00 -- 1.00
97 SE2 0.01 - 1.00 0.002 - 0.200 A SEF2 Threshold setting (if SE2EN=On) -- 0.05 / 0.010 -- 0.05 / 0.010
98 TSE2 0.00 - 300.00 s SEF2 Definite time setting.(if MSE2=DT) -- 1.00 -- 1.00
100 TSE3 0.00 - 300.00 s SEF3 Definite time setting (if SE3EN=On) -- 1.00 -- 1.00
102 TSE4 0.00 - 300.00 s SEF4 Definite time setting.(if SE4EN=On) -- 1.00 -- 1.00
103 SE1-k 0.00 - 300.00 -- Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1. -- 0.00 -- 0.00
104 SE1-α 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto -- 0.00 -- 0.00
105 SE1-C 0.000 - 5.000 -- ditto -- 0.00 -- 0.00
106 SE1-kr 0.00 - 300.00 -- ditto -- 0.00 -- 0.00
107 SE1-β 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto --(0.00) 0.00 --(0.00) 0.00
108 UC UC1 0.5 - 10.0 0.10 - 2.00 A UC1 Threshold setting (if UC1EN=On) 1.0 / 0.20
109 TUC1 0.00 - 300.00 s UC1 Definite time setting (if UC1EN=On) 1.00
110 UC2 0.5 - 10.0 0.10 - 2.00 A UC2 Threshold setting (if UC2EN=On) 2.0 / 0.40
111 TUC2 0.00 - 300.00 s UC2 Definite time setting (if UC2EN=On) 1.00
112 Thermal THM 2.0 - 10.0 0.40 - 2.00 A Thermal overload setting (if OLTEN=On) 5.0 / 1.00
113 THMIP 0.0 - 5.0 0.00 - 1.00 A Pre Current value (if OLTEN=On) 0.0 / 0.00
114 TTHM 0.5 - 500.0 min Thermal Time Constant (if OLTEN=On) 10.0
115 THMA 50 - 99 % Thermal alarm setting (if OLTEN =On & ALTEN=On) 80
116 BCD BCD 0.10 - 1.00 -- Broken Conductor Threshold setting (if BCDEN=On) 0.20
117 TBCD 0.00 - 300.00 s Broken Conductor Definite time setting. (if BCDEN=On) 1.00
118 CBF CBF 0.5 - 10.0 0.10 - 2.00 A CBF Threshold setting (if CBFEN=On) 2.5 / 0.50
119 TBTC 0.00 - 300.00 s Back trip Definite time setting 0.50
120 TRTC 0.00 - 300.00 s Re-trip Definite time setting 0.40
121 CLP/ICD OC1 0.1 - 25.0 0.02 - 5.00 A OC1 Threshold setting in CLP mode. 10.0 / 2.00
122 OC2 0.1 - 25.0 0.02 - 5.00 A OC2 Threshold setting in CLP mode. 25.0 / 5.00
126 EF1 0.1 - 25.0 0.02 - 5.00 A EF1 Threshold setting in CLP mode. -- 10.0 / 2.00 -- -- 10.0 / 2.00 --
130 SE1 0.01 - 1.00 0.002 - 0.200 A SEF1 Threshold setting in CLP mode. -- 0.10 / 0.020 -- 0.10 / 0.020
134 BCD 0.１0 - 1.00 -- Broken Conductor Threshold setting in CLP mode. 0.40
135 TCLE 0 - 10000 s Cold load enable timer (if CLEN=On) 100
136 TCLR 0 - 10000 s Cold load reset timer (if CLEN=On) 100
137 ICLDO 0.5 - 10.0 0.10 - 2.00 A Cold load drop-out threshold setting (if CLDOEN=On) 2.5 / 0.50
138 TCLDO 0.00 - 100.00 s Cold load drop-out timer (if CLDOEN=1) 0.00
139 ICD-2f 10 - 50 % Sensitivity of 2f 15
140 ICDOC 0.5 - 25.0 0.10 - 5.00 A Threshold of fundamental current 0.5 / 0.10
 206 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Setting 2
Default Setting of Relay Series(5A rating / 1A rating)
Range
No. Name Units Contents Model1 Model2 User
1 Passwd Setting Password - -- Password for Setting menu 0000
2 Notes Plant name - -- Plant name no-name
3 Des. Description - -- Description no-data
4 Com. HDLC 1 - 32 -- Address for RSM100 1
5 IEC 0 - 254 -- Address for IEC103 2
6 Protocol HDLC / IEC -- Switch for communications HDLC
7 232C 9.6 / 19.2 / 57.6 -- ditto 9.6
8 IECBR 9.6 / 19.2 -- ditto 19.2
9 IECBLK Normal / Blocked -- ditto Normal
10 Record BITRN 0 - 128 -- Number of bi-trigger (on/off) events 100
11 Time 0.1 - 3.0 s Record time 2.0

12 OC 0.1 - 250.0 0.02 - 50.00 A OC 10.0 / 2.00
13 EF 0.1 - 250.0 0.02 - 50.00 A EF -- 3.0 / 0.60 -- -- 3.0 / 0.60 --
14 SEF 0.01 - 1.00 0.002 - 0.200 A SEF -- 1.00 / 0.200 -- 1.00 / 0.200
15 Trip Off / On -- Disturbance trigger Trip On
16 OC Off / On -- Disturbance trigger OC On
17 EF Off / On -- Disturbance trigger EF -- On -- -- On --
18 SEF Off / On -- Disturbance trigger SEF -- On -- On
19 SIG1 0 - 3071 -- Disturbance record binary signal #1 Refer to the "GRL150(Disturbance)"sheet.
20 SIG2 0 - 3071 -- Disturbance record binary signal #2 ditto
51 TCSPEN Off / On / Opt-On -- Trip Circuit Supervision Enable Off
52 CBSMEN Off / On -- CB condition super visor enable Off
53 DSSMEN Off / On -- DS condition super visor enable Off
54 TCAEN Off / On -- Trip CounterAlarm Enable Off
55 ΣI^yAEN Off / On -- ΣI^y Alarm Enable Off
56 OPTAEN Off / On -- Operate Time Alarm Enable Off
57 FERAEN Off / On -- Frame error rate alarm enable Off
58 TCALM 1 - 10000 -- Trip Count Alarm Threshold 10000
59 ΣI^yALM 10 - 10000 E6 ΣI^y Alarm 10000
60 YVALUE 1.0 - 2.0 -- Y value 2.0
61 OPTALM 100 - 5000 ms Operate Time Alarm Threshold 1000
62 CF-PER 1 - 60 s CF period threshold 10
63 FERALM 0.0 - 50.0 % 20.0
 207 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Default Setting of Relay Series(5A rating / 1A rating)

Range
No. Name Units Contents Model1 Model2 User
64 Status Display Prim. / Second. -- metering Prim.
65 Time sync. Off / BI / RS / IE / IR -- time sync source Off
66 GMT -12 - +12 hrs time zone -- 0
67 Binary BI1 BI1PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00
68 Input BI1DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay 0.00
69 BI1SNS Norm / Inv -- Binary Input Sense Norm
70 BI2 BI2PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Pick-up delay 0.00
71 BI2DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input Drop-off delay 0.00
91 Alarm1 Text Specified by user -- Alarm1 Text ALARM1
95 LED LED1 Logic OR / AND -- LED Logic Gate Type OR
96 Reset Inst / Latch -- LED Reset operation Inst
97 In #1 0 - 3071 -- LED Functions 0
98 In #2 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
99 In #3 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
100 In #4 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
101 LED2 Logic OR / AND -- LED Logic Gate Type OR
103 In #1 0 - 3071 -- LED Functions 0
104 In #2 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
105 In #3 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
106 In #4 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
107 LED3 Logic OR / AND -- LED Logic Gate Type OR
109 In #1 0 - 3071 -- LED Functions 0
110 In #2 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
111 In #3 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
112 In #4 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
113 IND1 Reset Inst / Latch -- IND Reset operation Inst
114 BIT1 0 - 3071 -- Virtual LED 0
115 BIT2 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
116 BIT3 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
117 BIT4 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
118 BIT5 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
119 BIT6 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
120 BIT7 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
121 BIT8 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
122 IND2 Reset Inst / Latch -- IND Reset operation Inst
123 BIT1 0 - 3071 -- Virtual LED 0
124 BIT2 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
125 BIT3 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
126 BIT4 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
127 BIT5 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
128 BIT6 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
129 BIT7 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
130 BIT8 0 - 3071 -- ditto 0
 208 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
PLC Default setting

Output Timing Logic expression Delay Time / Flip Flop
Cycle Flip Flop Timer
№ Signal Turn All models Back Release Off On One None
30 90 User Norm Time Value
Up Signal Delay Delay Shot
### CB N/O CONT X [528]BI1 COM T X
### CB N/C CONT X [529]BI2 COM T X
### DS N/O CONT X [530]BI3 COM T X
### DS N/C CONT X [531]BI4 COM T X
###
###
###
###
###
###
###
### EXT CB CLOSE X [532]BI5 COM T X
### TC FAIL
###
###
### IND.RESET X [535]BI8 COM T X
### PROT BLOCK
### DIF BLOCK
### TR1 BLOCK
### TR2 BLOCK
### OC1 BLOCK
### OC2 BLOCK
### OC3 BLOCK
### OC4 BLOCK
### EF1 BLOCK
### EF2 BLOCK
### EF3 BLOCK
### EF4 BLOCK
### SEF1 BLOCK
### SEF2 BLOCK
### SEF3 BLOCK
### SEF4 BLOCK
### UC1 BLOCK
### UC2 BLOCK
### CBF BLOCK
###
### THM BLOCK
### THMA BLOCK
### BCD BLOCK
###
###
###
###
###
###
###
###
###
### DIF-A FS X [264]DIFFS OP X
### DIF-B FS X [264]DIFFS OP X
### DIF-C FS X [264]DIFFS OP X
### R.DATA ZERO
### EXT TRIP-A
### EXT TRIP-B
### EXT TRIP-C
### EXT TRIP
###
###
###
###
### CBF INIT-A
### CBF INIT-B
### CBF INIT-C
### CBF INIT X [348]GEN.TRIP X
### UC1-A DO X [200]UCDO-A X
### UC1-B DO X [201]UCDO-B X
### UC1-C DO X [202]UCDO-C X
 209 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
PLC Default setting

1603
1604 UC2-A DO X [200]UCDO-A X
1605 UC2-B DO X [201]UCDO-B X
1606 UC2-C DO X [202]UCDO-C X
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620 OC1 INST TP
1621 OC2 INST TP
1622 OC3 INST TP
1623 OC4 INST TP
1624 EF1 INST TP
1625 EF2 INST TP
1626 EF3 INST TP
1627 EF4 INST TP
1628 SEF1 INST TP
1629 SEF2 INST TP
1630 SEF3 INST TP
1631 SEF4 INST TP
1632 UC1 INST TP
1633 UC2 INST TP
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648 TR1-R1
1649 TR2-R1
1650 L.TEST-R1 X [1104]SUB COM1-R1 X
1651 I.LINK-R1 X [1092]COM5-R1 X
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664 TP-A DELAY X [361]GEN.TP-A X 60 ms
1665 TP-B DELAY X [362]GEN.TP-B X 60 ms
1666 TP-C DELAY X [363]GEN.TP-C X 60 ms
1667 TP-N DELAY X [364]GEN.TP-N X 60 ms
1668
1669
1670
 210 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
PLC Default setting

1671
1672 TP DELAY X [360]GEN.TP X 60 ms
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680 DIF-A IC BLK X [373]ICD + [1099]COM4-R1 UF X
1681 DIF-B IC BLK X [373]ICD + [1099]COM4-R1 UF X
1682 DIF-C IC BLK X [373]ICD + [1099]COM4-R1 UF X
1683 OC IC BLK X [373]ICD X
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
:
:
2038
2039
2040
 211 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
PLC Default setting

2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048 COM1-S
2049 COM2-S
2050 COM3-S
2051 COM4-S X [374]ICD_BLK-S X
2052 COM5-S X [388]I.LINK X
2053
2054
2055
2056 SUB_COM1-S X [390]LOCAL_TEST X
2057 SUB_COM2-S
2058 SUB_COM3-S
2059 SUB_COM4-S
2060 SUB_COM5-S
2061
2062
2063
2064 SUB2_COM1-S
2065 SUB2_COM2-S
2066 SUB2_COM3-S
2067 SUB2_COM4-S
2068 SUB2_COM5-S
2069 SUB2_COM6-S
2070 SUB2_COM7-S
2071 SUB2_COM8-S
2072 SUB2_COM9-S
2073 SUB2_COM10-S
2074 SUB2_COM11-S
2075 SUB2_COM12-S
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
:
:
2548
2549
2550
 212 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
PLC Default setting

2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560 TP1 X [348]GEN.TRIP X
2561 TP2 X [348]GEN.TRIP X
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
 213 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
PLC Default setting

2621
2622
2623
2624 F.RECORD1
2625 F.RECORD2
2626 F.RECORD3
2627 F.RECORD4
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632 D.RECORD1
2633 D.RECORD2
2634 D.RECORD3
2635 D.RECORD4
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640 SET.GROUP1
2641 SET.GROUP2
2642 SET.GROUP3
2643 SET.GROUP4
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648 SYNC_CLOCK
2649
2650
2651
2652 ALARM1
2653 ALARM2
2654 ALARM3
2655 ALARM4
2656 CON_TPMD1
2657 CON_TPMD2
2658 CON_TPMD3
2659 CON_TPMD4
2660 CON_TPMD5
2661 CON_TPMD6
2662 CON_TPMD7
2663 CON_TPMD8
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684 ARC_COM_RECV
2685 TEL_COM_RECV
2686 PROT_COM_RECV
2687
2688 TPLED_RST_RCV
2689 ALMLED_RST_RCV
2690 TPALM_RST_RCV
 214 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
PLC Default setting

2691
2692
:
:
2813
2814
2815
2816 TEMP001
2817 TEMP002
2818 TEMP003
2819 TEMP004
2820 TEMP005
2821 TEMP006
2822 TEMP007
2823 TEMP008
2824 TEMP009
2825 TEMP010
2826 TEMP011
2827 TEMP012
2828 TEMP013
2829 TEMP014
2830 TEMP015
2831 TEMP016
2832 TEMP017
2833 TEMP018
2834 TEMP019
2835 TEMP020
2836 TEMP021
2837 TEMP022
2838 TEMP023
2839 TEMP024
2840 TEMP025
2841 TEMP026
2842 TEMP027
2843 TEMP028
2844 TEMP029
2845 TEMP030
2846 TEMP031
2847 TEMP032
2848 TEMP033
2849 TEMP034
2850 TEMP035
2851 TEMP036
2852 TEMP037
2853 TEMP038
2854 TEMP039
2855 TEMP040
2856 TEMP041
2857 TEMP042
2858 TEMP043
2859 TEMP044
2860 TEMP045
2861 TEMP046
2862 TEMP047
2863 TEMP048
2864 TEMP049
2865 TEMP050
2866 TEMP051
2867 TEMP052
2868 TEMP053
2869 TEMP054
2870 TEMP055
2871 TEMP056
2872 TEMP057
2873 TEMP058
2874 TEMP059
2875 TEMP060
 215 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
PLC Default setting

2876 TEMP061
2877 TEMP062
2878 TEMP063
2879 TEMP064
2880 TEMP065
2881 TEMP066
2882 TEMP067
2883 TEMP068
2884 TEMP069
2885 TEMP070
2886 TEMP071
2887 TEMP072
2888 TEMP073
2889 TEMP074
2890 TEMP075
2891 TEMP076
2892 TEMP077
2893 TEMP078
2894 TEMP079
2895 TEMP080
2896 TEMP081
2897 TEMP082
2898 TEMP083
2899 TEMP084
2900 TEMP085
2901 TEMP086
2902 TEMP087
2903 TEMP088
2904 TEMP089
2905 TEMP090
2906 TEMP091
2907 TEMP092
2908 TEMP093
2909 TEMP094
2910 TEMP095
2911 TEMP096
2912 TEMP097
2913 TEMP098
2914 TEMP099
2915 TEMP100
2916 TEMP101
2917 TEMP102
2918 TEMP103
2919 TEMP104
2920 TEMP105
2921 TEMP106
2922 TEMP107
2923 TEMP108
2924 TEMP109
2925 TEMP110
2926 TEMP111
2927 TEMP112
2928 TEMP113
2929 TEMP114
2930 TEMP115
2931 TEMP116
2932 TEMP117
2933 TEMP118
2934 TEMP119
2935 TEMP120
2936 TEMP121
2937 TEMP122
2938 TEMP123
2939 TEMP124
2940 TEMP125
2941 TEMP126
2942 TEMP127
2943 TEMP128
2944 TEMP129
2945 TEMP130
 216 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
PLC Default setting

2946 TEMP131
2947 TEMP132
2948 TEMP133
2949 TEMP134
2950 TEMP135
2951 TEMP136
2952 TEMP137
2953 TEMP138
2954 TEMP139
2955 TEMP140
2956 TEMP141
2957 TEMP142
2958 TEMP143
2959 TEMP144
2960 TEMP145
2961 TEMP146
2962 TEMP147
2963 TEMP148
2964 TEMP149
2965 TEMP150
2966 TEMP151
2967 TEMP152
2968 TEMP153
2969 TEMP154
2970 TEMP155
2971 TEMP156
2972 TEMP157
2973 TEMP158
2974 TEMP159
2975 TEMP160
2976 TEMP161
2977 TEMP162
2978 TEMP163
2979 TEMP164
2980 TEMP165
2981 TEMP166
2982 TEMP167
2983 TEMP168
2984 TEMP169
2985 TEMP170
2986 TEMP171
2987 TEMP172
2988 TEMP173
2989 TEMP174
2990 TEMP175
2991 TEMP176
2992 TEMP177
2993 TEMP178
2994 TEMP179
2995 TEMP180
2996 TEMP181
2997 TEMP182
2998 TEMP183
2999 TEMP184
3000 TEMP185
3001 TEMP186
3002 TEMP187
3003 TEMP188
3004 TEMP189
3005 TEMP190
3006 TEMP191
3007 TEMP192
3008 TEMP193
3009 TEMP194
3010 TEMP195
3011 TEMP196
3012 TEMP197
3013 TEMP198
3014 TEMP199
3015 TEMP200
 217 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
PLC Default setting

3016 TEMP201
3017 TEMP202
3018 TEMP203
3019 TEMP204
3020 TEMP205
3021 TEMP206
3022 TEMP207
3023 TEMP208
3024 TEMP209
3025 TEMP210
3026 TEMP211
3027 TEMP212
3028 TEMP213
3029 TEMP214
3030 TEMP215
3031 TEMP216
3032 TEMP217
3033 TEMP218
3034 TEMP219
3035 TEMP220
3036 TEMP221
3037 TEMP222
3038 TEMP223
3039 TEMP224
3040 TEMP225
3041 TEMP226
3042 TEMP227
3043 TEMP228
3044 TEMP229
3045 TEMP230
3046 TEMP231
3047 TEMP232
3048 TEMP233
3049 TEMP234
3050 TEMP235
3051 TEMP236
3052 TEMP237
3053 TEMP238
3054 TEMP239
3055 TEMP240
3056 TEMP241
3057 TEMP242
3058 TEMP243
3059 TEMP244
3060 TEMP245
3061 TEMP246
3062 TEMP247
3063 TEMP248
3064 TEMP249
3065 TEMP250
3066 TEMP251
3067 TEMP252
3068 TEMP253
3069 TEMP254
3070 TEMP255
3071 TEMP256
 218 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Event record default setting

Default setting
No. Name Range Unit Contents User setting
Sig. NO. Signal name type
1 EV1 0 - 3071 － Event record signal 348 GEN.TRIP On/Off
2 EV2 0 - 3071 － ditto 353 GEN.ALARM On/Off
3 EV3 0 - 3071 － ditto 256 DIF_TRIP On/Off
4 EV4 0 - 3071 － ditto 272 OC1_TRIP On/Off
7 EV7 0 - 3071 － ditto 284 OC4_ALARM On/Off
8 EV8 0 - 3071 － ditto 292 EF1_TRIP On/Off
11 EV11 0 - 3071 － ditto 295 EF4_ALARM On/Off
12 EV12 0 - 3071 － ditto 300 SEF1_TRIP On/Off
13 EV13 0 - 3071 － ditto 301 SEF1-S2_TRIP On/Off
16 EV16 0 - 3071 － ditto 304 SEF4_ALARM On/Off
17 EV17 0 - 3071 － ditto 308 UC1_TRIP On/Off
18 EV18 0 - 3071 － ditto 312 UC2_ALARM On/Off
19 EV19 0 - 3071 － ditto 320 THM_ALARM On/Off
20 EV20 0 - 3071 － ditto 321 THM_TRIP On/Off
21 EV21 0 - 3071 － ditto 322 BCD_TRIP On/Off
22 EV22 0 - 3071 － ditto 328 CBF_RETRIP On/Off
23 EV23 0 - 3071 － ditto 332 CBF_TRIP On/Off
24 EV24 0 - 3071 － ditto 340 TR1_TRIP On/Off
25 EV25 0 - 3071 － ditto 341 INTER_TRIP1 On/Off
26 EV26 0 - 3071 － ditto 342 TR2_TRIP On/Off
27 EV27 0 - 3071 － ditto 343 INTER_TRIP2 On/Off
28 EV28 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
29 EV29 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
30 EV30 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
31 EV31 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
32 EV32 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
33 EV33 0 - 3071 － ditto 48 DIF-A On/Off
34 EV34 0 - 3071 － ditto 49 DIF-B On/Off
35 EV35 0 - 3071 － ditto 50 DIF-C On/Off
36 EV36 0 - 3071 － ditto 368 CLP_STATE0 On/Off
40 EV40 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
41 EV41 0 - 3071 － ditto 512 BI1_COMMAND On/Off
49 EV49 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
50 EV50 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
51 EV51 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
52 EV52 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
53 EV53 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
54 EV54 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
55 EV55 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
56 EV56 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
57 EV57 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
58 EV58 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
59 EV59 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
60 EV60 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
61 EV61 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
62 EV62 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
63 EV63 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
64 EV64 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
 219 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Event record default setting

Default setting
No. Name Range Unit Contents User setting
Sig. NO. Signal name type
65 EV65 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
66 EV66 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
67 EV67 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
68 EV68 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
69 EV69 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
70 EV70 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
71 EV71 0 - 3071 － ditto 1345 RELAY_FAIL On/Off
72 EV72 0 - 3071 － ditto 1346 RELAY_FAIL-A On/Off
73 EV73 0 - 3071 － ditto 1348 SUM_err On/Off
74 EV74 0 - 3071 － ditto 1350 SRAM_err On/Off
75 EV75 0 - 3071 － ditto 1351 BU-RAM_err On/Off
76 EV76 0 - 3071 － ditto 1353 EEPROM_err On/Off
77 EV77 0 - 3071 － ditto 1354 A/D_err On/Off
78 EV78 0 - 3071 － ditto 1356 CT_err On/Off
79 EV79 0 - 3071 － ditto 1358 DC_err On/Off
80 EV80 0 - 3071 － ditto 1359 TC_fail On/Off
81 EV81 0 - 3071 － ditto 1360 CB_err On/Off
82 EV82 0 - 3071 － ditto 1361 TP_COUNT_ALM On/Off
83 EV83 0 - 3071 － ditto 1362 OP_time_ALM On/Off
84 EV84 0 - 3071 － ditto 1363 Iy_ALM On/Off
85 EV85 0 - 3071 － ditto 1366 Id_err On/Off
86 EV86 0 - 3071 － ditto 1369 DS_err On/Off
87 EV87 0 - 3071 － ditto 1370 ROM_data_err On/Off
88 EV88 0 - 3071 － ditto 1371 Unready1_ALM On/Off
89 EV89 0 - 3071 － ditto 1372 COM1_fail On/Off
90 EV90 0 - 3071 － ditto 1373 Sync1_fail On/Off
91 EV91 0 - 3071 － ditto 452 Term1_rdy On/Off
92 EV92 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
93 EV93 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
94 EV94 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
95 EV95 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
96 EV96 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
97 EV97 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
98 EV98 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
99 EV99 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
100 EV100 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On/Off
101 EV101 0 - 3071 － ditto 1024 SET.GROUP1 On
105 EV105 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
106 EV106 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
107 EV107 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
108 EV108 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
109 EV109 0 - 3071 － ditto 1464 Sys.set_change On
110 EV110 0 - 3071 － ditto 1465 Rly.set_change On
111 EV111 0 - 3071 － ditto 1466 Grp.set_change On
112 EV112 0 - 3071 － ditto 1352 Data_lost On
113 EV113 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
114 EV114 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
115 EV115 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
116 EV116 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
117 EV117 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
118 EV118 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
119 EV119 0 - 3071 － ditto 1461 PLC_data_CHG On
120 EV120 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 On
121 EV121 0 - 3071 － ditto 1418 LED_RST On
122 EV122 0 - 3071 － ditto 1448 DEMAND_CLR On
123 EV123 0 - 3071 － ditto 1450 F.Record_CLR On
124 EV124 0 - 3071 － ditto 1452 E.Record_CLR On
125 EV125 0 - 3071 － ditto 1453 D.Record_CLR On
126 EV126 0 - 3071 － ditto 1454 CF_count_CLR On
127 EV127 0 - 3071 － ditto 1462 TP_COUNT_CLR On
128 EV128 0 - 3071 － ditto 1463 Iy_COUNT_CLR On
 220 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Disturbance record default setting

Default setting User
No. Name Range Unit Contents
NO. Signal name setting
disturbance record
1 SIG1 0 - 3071 － 48 DIF-A
triger
2 SIG2 0 - 3071 － ditto 49 DIF-B
3 SIG3 0 - 3071 － ditto 50 DIF-C
4 SIG4 0 - 3071 － ditto 264 DIFFS_OP
5 SIG5 0 - 3071 － ditto 256 DIF_TRIP
6 SIG6 0 - 3071 － ditto 63 RELAY_BLOCK
7 SIG7 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
8 SIG8 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
9 SIG9 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
10 SIG10 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
11 SIG11 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
12 SIG12 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
13 SIG13 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
14 SIG14 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
15 SIG15 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
16 SIG16 0 - 3071 － ditto 348 GEN.TRIP
17 SIG17 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
18 SIG18 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
19 SIG19 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
20 SIG20 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
21 SIG21 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
22 SIG22 0 - 3071 － ditto 0 NA
23 SIG23 0 - 3071 － ditto 512 BI1_COMMAND
31 SIG31 0 - 3071 － ditto 388 I.LINK
32 SIG32 0 - 3071 － ditto 432 REM1_IN_SRV
 221 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 222 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix H
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/Binary output circuit check
3.3 AC input circuit check
4. Function test
4.1 Phase current differential element DIF test
4.2 Inverse definite minimum time overcurrent
element(IDMT) OC, EF and SEF test
4.3 Thermal overload element
4.4 CBF and UC element test
4.5 BCD element check
4.6 Cold load function check
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
 223 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
1. Relay identification
Type Serial number

Model System frequency
Station Date
Circuit Engineer
Protection scheme Witness
Active settings group number
2. Preliminary check
Ratings
CT shorting contacts
DC power supply
Power up
Wiring
Relay inoperative
alarm contact
Calendar and clock
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/Binary output circuit check
Binary input circuit

Binary output circuit
3.3 AC input circuit
 224 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
4. Function test
4.1 Phase current differential element DIF test

(1) Minimum operating value test
Tap setting I Measured current
(2) Percentage restraining characteristic test
Tap setting I Measured current (I2)
 Tap
 Tap
20  Tap
4.2 Inverse definite minimum time overcurrent element (IDMT) OC, EF and SEF test
Element Test current Measured operating time

OC 1.2  Is
20  Is
EF 1.2  Is
20  Is
SEF 1.2  Is
20  Is
4.3 Thermal overload element test
Element Test current Measured operating time

THM-A 1.2  Is
THM-T 10  Is
4.4 CBF and UC element test
Element Tap setting I Measured current

CBF
UC
 225 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
4.5 BCD element check
4.6 Cold load function check
5. Protection scheme test
Scheme Results
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
Scheme Results
On load check
Signaling circuit
Tripping circuit
 226 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix I
Return Repair Form
 227 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please fill in this form and return it to Toshiba Corporation with the GRL150 to be repaired.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Complex

1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan
For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department
Quality Assurance Section
Type: GRL150 Model:

(Example: Type: GRL150 Model: 110A-22-10 )
Product No.:
Serial No. :
Date:
1. Why the relay is being returned ?

 mal-operation
 does not operate
 increased error
 investigation
 others
2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are
very helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please inform us of this information in respect to in the incident on a Floppy Disk, or by
completing the Fault Record sheet and Relay Setting sheet attached.
 228 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year Time / / / : : .
(Example: 04/ Nov./ 2004 15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:
Prefault values
Ia: A IaR: A
Ib : A IbR: A
Ic: A IcR: A
Ie: A Ida: A
I1 : A Idb: A
I2 : A Idc: A
I0 : A
I2 / I1 :
Fault values
Ia: A IaR: A
Ib : A IbR: A
Ic: A IcR: A
Ie: A Ida: A
I1 : A Idb: A
I2 : A Idc: A
I0 : A
THM: %
 229 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident.
4. Please write the detail of the incident.
5. Date of the incident occurred.

Day/ Month/ Year: / / /
(Example: 10/ Nov./ 2004)
6. Please write any comments on the GRL150, including the document.
Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:
Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:
 230 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix J
Technical Data
 231 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Technical Data
Ratings
AC current In: 1A or 5A
Frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz
DC auxiliary supply: 110/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 150Vdc)
220/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 - 300Vdc)
48/54/60Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 - 72Vdc)
24/30Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 - 36Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply:  12%
DC supply interruption: upto 50ms at 110V
Binary input circuit DC voltage: 110/125Vdc
220/250Vdc
48/54/60Vdc
24/30Vdc
Overload Ratings
AC current inputs: 4 times rated current continuous
100 times rated current for 1 second
Burden
AC phase current inputs:  0.1VA (1A rating),  0.3VA (5A rating)
AC earth current inputs:  0.1VA (1A rating),  0.3VA (5A rating)
AC sensitive earth inputs:  0.1VA (1A rating),  0.2VA (5A rating)
DC power supply:  10W (quiescent),  15W (maximum)
Binary input circuit:  0.5W per input at 110Vdc
Phase-segregated current differential protection
DIFI1 (Small current region): 0.10 to 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.50 to 10.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
DIFI2 (Large current region): 0.2 to 24.0A in 0.1A steps (1A rating)
1.0 to 120.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
Operating time: less than 35ms at 300% of DIFI1
Phase Overcurrent Protection
P/F 1st and 2nd Overcurrent thresholds: OFF, 0.02 - 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
OFF, 0.1 - 25.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
P/F 3rd and 4th Overcurrent thresholds: OFF, 0.02 - 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
OFF, 0.1 -250.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
Delay type (for 1st threshold) : DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI
DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
Reset Type (for 1 threshold):
st Definite Time or Dependent Time.
Reset Definite Delay: 0.0 - 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS: 0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
 232 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Earth Fault Protection

E/F 1st and 2nd Overcurrent thresholds: OFF, 0.02 - 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
E/F 3rd and 4th Overcurrent thresholds: OFF, 0.02 - 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
OFF, 0.1 -250.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
Delay type (for 1st threshold): DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
Reset Type (for 1st threshold): Definite Time or Dependent Time.
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS: 0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
SEF 1st, 2nd 3rd, & 4th Overcurrent thresholds: OFF, 0.002 - 0.200A in 0.001A steps (1A rating)
Delay Type (for 1st threshold): DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
TMS: 0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
Reset Type: Definite Time or Dependent Time.
RTMS: 0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
Phase Undercurrent Protection
Undercurrent 1st, 2nd thresholds: OFF, 0.10 - 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
DTL Delay: 0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01A steps
Inrush Current Detector
Second harmonic ratio setting (I2f / I1f): 10 - 50% in 1% steps
Overcurrent thresholds: 0.10 - 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.5 - 25.0A in 0.1A steps (5A rating)
Thermal Overload Protection
Iθ = k.IFLC (Thermal setting): OFF, 0.40 - 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Time constant: 0.5 - 500.0mins in 0.1min steps
Thermal alarm: OFF, 50% to 99% in 1% steps
Broken Conductor Protection
Broken conductor threshold (I2/I1): OFF, 0.10 - 1.00 in 0.01 steps
CBF Protection
CBF threshold: OFF, 0.10 - 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
CBF stage 1 DTL: 0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
CBF stage 2 DTL: 0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Direct fibre optic interface
Type of fibre: Single mode 10/125 m
Connector: LC
Wave length 1300nm
Transmission distance: < 20km
 233 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Pilot wire interface

Recommended Cable type: Twisted pair
Max pilot length using AWG24 (0.51mm): 3.0km
Connector: M3.5 screw terminals
Isolation: 5kV ac (integral)
20kV ac (with external isolation transformer EB-110)
Communication port - local PC (RS232)
Connection: Point to point
Cable type: Multi-core (straight)
Cable length: 15m (max.)
Connector: RS232C 9-way D-type female
Communication port - remote PC (RS485)
Connection: Multidrop (max. 32 relays)
Cable type: Twisted pair cable with shield
Cable length: 1200m (max.)
Connector: Screw terminals
Isolation: 1kVac for 1 min.
Transmission rate: 64kpbs for RSM system
9.6, 19.2kbps for IEC60870-5-103
Communication port - remote PC (Fibre Optic for IEC60870-5-103)
Cable type: Graded-index multi-mode 50/125 or 62.5/125m fibre
Connector: ST
Transmission rate: 9.6, 19.2kbps for IEC60870-5-103
Time synchronization port
Connection: Screw terminals
Time code: IRIG-B (AM modulated, TTL)
Binary Inputs
Number of inputs 8
Operating voltage Typical 74Vdc (min. 70Vdc) for 110/125Vdc rating
Typical 138Vdc (min. 125Vdc) for 220/250Vdc rating
Typical 31Vdc (min. 28Vdc) for 48/54V/60Vdc rating
Typical 15Vdc (min. 13Vdc) for 24/30Vdc rating
Binary Outputs
Number 7
Ratings: TP1, TP2 for tripping Make and carry: 4A continuously
Make and carry: 20A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R5ms)
Break: 0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms) or 0.2A, 110Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Ratings: BO1 to BO5 Make and carry: 4A continuously
Make and carry: 10A, 220Vdc for 0.2s(Resistive load)
Break: 0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Mechanical design
Weight 5kg
Case color 2.5Y7.5/1(approximation to Munsell value)
Installation Flush mounting
 234 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE CLAIMS

Test Standards Details
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC60068-2-1/2 Operating range: -10C to +55C.
Storage / Transit: -25C to +70C.
Humidity IEC60068-2-78 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
Enclosure Protection IEC60529 IP51 (Rear: IP20)
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC60255-5 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV(peak),
1.2/50s, 0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals
and earth.
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC60255-22-1 Class 3, 1MHz 2.5kV applied to all ports in common mode.
Disturbance / Damped IEC61000-4-12 / 1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.
Oscillatory Wave EN61000-4-12
Electrostatic Discharge IEC60255-22-2 Class 3, 6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.
IEC61000-4-2 / EN61000-4-2
Radiated RF IEC60255-22-3 Class 3, Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz
Electromagnetic IEC61000-4-3 / EN61000-4-3 and 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450,
Disturbance 900 and 1890MHz.
Fast Transient IEC60255-22-4, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.
Disturbance IEC61000-4-4 / EN61000-4-4
Surge Immunity IEC60255-22-5, 1.2/50s surge in common/differential modes:
IEC61000-4-5 / EN61000-4-5 HV ports: 2kV/1kV
PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV
RS485 port: 1kV/ -
Conducted RF IEC60255-22-6 Class 3, 10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.
Electromagnetic IEC61000-4-6 / EN61000-4-6 Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.
Disturbance
Power Frequency IEC60255-22-7, 300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.
Disturbance IEC61000-4-16 / 150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
EN61000-4-16 Not applicable to AC inputs.
Conducted and IEC60255-25, Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
IEC61000-6-4 / EN61000-6-4 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 30m):
30 to 230MHz: <30dB
230 to 1000MHz: <37dB
 235 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Test Standards Details

European Commission Directives
89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to EN
61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.
73/23/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage
Directive is demonstrated according to EN 50178 and EN
60255-5.
EXTERNAL 20kV ISOLATION TRANSFORMER (OPTION)
Type EB-110
Isolation voltage 20kV
Connection terminal Screw terminal (Refer to Appendix E.)
Weight 3 kg
 236 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix K
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
 237 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with : Measuring element output signal
Marked with : Signal number
Marked with : Signal number and name of binary input by PLC function
Signal No. Signal name

Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch
Marked with " " : Scheme switch position
Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal
AND gates
A A B C Output
B & 1 1 1 1
Output
Other cases 0
C
A A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 0 1
Other cases 0
C
A
A B C Output
B & Output
1 0 0 1
C Other cases 0
OR gates
A A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 0 0 0
C Other cases 1
A A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 0 1 0
C Other cases 1
A A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 1 1 0
C Other cases 1
 238 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Signal inversion
A Output
A 1 Output 0 1
1 0
Timer
t
Delaye pick-up timer with fixed setting
0
XXX: Set time
XXX
0
Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting
t
XXX: Set time
XXX
t 0 Delaye pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY
0 t Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY
One-shot timer
A
A Output
Output
XXX - YYY

Flip-flop
S R Output
S 0 0 No change
F/F Output 1 0 1
R 0 1 0
1 1 0
Scheme switch
A Switch Output
A Output
1 ON 1
ON Other cases 0
Switch Output
 Output ON 1
ON OFF 0
 239 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
 240 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix L
Inverse Time Characteristics
 241 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (NI) IEC/UK Inverse Curves (VI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5) (Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
100 100
10
10
Operating Time (s)

Operating Time (s)
TMS TMS
1.5 1 1.5
1.0
1.
0.5
0.5
1
0.2
0.1
0.2 0.1
0.1
0.1 0.01
1 10 100 1 10 100
Normal Inverse Very Inverse
 242 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (EI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
1000
100
UK Inverse Curves (LTI)

1000
10
Operating Time (s)
100
Operating Time (s)
1
TMS
TMS
10 1.5
1.5 1.0
1.0
0.5
0.1 0.5
0.2
1
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.01 0.1
1 10 100 1 10 100
Extremely Inverse Long Time Inverse
 243 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
IEEE Inverse Curves (MI) IEEE Inverse Curves (VI)

100 100
10 10
Operating Time (s)

Operating Time (s)
TMS
TM
1.5
1 1
1.0 1.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.1 0.1 0.2

0.1
0.1
0.01 0.01
1 10 100 1 10 100
Moderately Inverse Very Inverse
 244 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
IEEE Inverse Curves (EI)

100
10
Operating Time (s)
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.01
1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Extremely Inverse
 245 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
US Inverse Curves (CO8) US Inverse Curves (CO2)

100 10
10
1
TMS
Operating Time (s)

Operating Time (s)
1.5
1 1.0
TMS
0.5
1.5
0.1
1.0
0.2
0.1 0.5
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.01 0.01
1 10 100 1 10 100
CO8 Inverse CO2 Short Time Inverse
 246 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix M
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
 247 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
IEC60870-5-103 Configurator
IEC103 configurator software is included in a same CD as RSM100, and can be installed easily
as follows:
Installation of IEC103 Configurator
Insert the CD-ROM (RSM100) into a CDROM drive to install this software on a PC.
Double click the “Setup.exe” of the folder “\IEC103Conf” under the root directory, and
operate it according to the message.
When installation has been completed, the IEC103 Configurator will be registered in the start
menu.
Starting IEC103 Configurator
Click [Start][Programs][IEC103 Configurator][IECConf] to the IEC103 Configurator
software.
Note: The instruction manual of IEC103 Configurator can be viewed by clicking
[Help][Manual] on IEC103 Configurator.
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
1. Physical Layer
1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485
Number of loads, 32 for one protection equipment
1.2 Optical interface
Glass fibre (option)
ST type connector (option)
1.3 Transmission speed
User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s
2. Application Layer
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
3. List of Information
The following items can be customized with the original software tool “IEC103 configurator”.
(For details, refer to “IEC103 configurator” manual No.6F2S0839.)
- Items for “Time-tagged message”: Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN, Transmission
condition(Signal number), COT
- Items for “Time-tagged measurands”: INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Signal
number), COT, Type of measurand quantities
- Items for “General command”: INF, FUN, Control condition(Signal number)
- Items for “Measurands”: Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurand, Type of
 248 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
measurand quantities
- Common setting
 Transmission cycle of Measurand frame
 FUN of System function
 Test mode, etc.
CAUTION: To be effective the setting data written via the RS232C, turn off the DC supply
of the relay and turn on again.
3. 1 IEC60870-5-103 Interface
3.1.1 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be sent using Function type (FUN) / Information numbers
(INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station.
3.1.2 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3.
3.1.3 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 or 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured
values can be customized.
3.1.4 Commands
The supported commands can be customized. The relay will respond to non-supported
commands with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command.
3.1.5 Test mode
In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing
in the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test
mode’. This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages
normally transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
3.1.6 Blocking of monitor direction
If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications
and measurands are no longer transmitted.
3.2 List of Information

The followings are the default settings.
 249 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
List of Information
IEC103 Configurator Default setting
INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI
ID Signal No. OFF ON
Standard Information numbers in monitor direction
System Function
0 End of General Interrogation Transmission completion of GI items. -- 8 10 255 -- -- --
0 Time Synchronization Time Synchronization ACK. -- 6 8 255 -- -- --
2 Reset FCB Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK -- 5 3 192 -- -- --
3 Reset CU Reset CU ACK -- 5 4 192 -- -- --
4 Start/Restart Relay start/restart -- 5 5 192 -- -- --
5 Power On Relay power on. Not supported -- -- --
Status Indications
If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set
16 Auto-recloser active Not supported
active, if impossible, inactive.
If protection using telecommunication is available,
17 Teleprotection active GI 1 1, 9, 12 192 722 1 2
this item is set to active. If not, set to inactive.
If the protection is available, this item is set to
18 Protection active GI 1 1, 9, 12 192 723 1 2
active. If not, set to inactive.
19 LED reset Reset of latched LEDs -- 1 1, 11, 12 192 1418 -- 2
Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control

20 Monitor direction blocked GI 1 9, 11 192 1040 1 2
system. IECBLK: "Blocked" settimg.
Transmission of testmode situation froma relay to
21 Test mode GI 1 9, 11 192 1039 1 2
control system. IECTST "ON" setting.
When a setting change has done at the local, the
22 Local parameter Setting Not supported
event is sent to control system.
23 Characteristic1 Setting group 1 active GI 1 1, 9, 11, 12 192 1024 1 2
27 Auxiliary input1 Binary input 1 No set

Supervision Indications
32 Measurand supervision I Zero sequence current supervision GI 1 1, 9 192 1356 1 2
33 Measurand supervision V Zero sequence voltage supervision Not supported
35 Phase sequence supervision Negative sequence voltage supevision Not supported
36 Trip circuit supervision Output circuit supervision GI 1 1, 9 192 1359 1 2
37 I>>backup operation Not supported
38 VT fuse failure VT failure Not supported
39 Teleprotection disturbed CF(Communication system Fail) supervision GI 1 1, 9 192 439 1 2
46 Group warning Only alarming GI 1 1, 9 192 1346 1 2
47 Group alarm Trip blocking and alarming GI 1 1, 9 192 1343 1 2
Earth Fault Indications
48 Earth Fault L1 A phase earth fault No set
49 Earth Fault L2 B phase earth fault No set
50 Earth Fault L3 C phase earth fault No set
51 Earth Fault Fwd Earth fault forward Not supported
52 Earth Fault Rev Earth fault reverse Not supported
 250 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8

INF Description Contents GI Type COT FUN DPI
ID Signal NO. OFF ON
Fault Indications
64 Start/pick-up L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up No set
65 Start/pick-up L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up No set
66 Start/pick-up L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up No set
67 Start/pick-up N Earth fault element pick-up No set
68 General trip Any trip -- 2 1 192 1037 -- 2
69 Trip L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase trip No set
70 Trip L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase trip No set
71 Trip L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase trip No set
72 Trip I>>(back-up) Back up trip Not supported
73 Fault location X In ohms Fault location Not supported
74 Fault forward/line Forward fault Not supported

75 Fault reverse/Busbar Reverse fault Not supported
Teleprotection Signal
76 Carrier signal sending Not supported
transmitted
77 Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving Not supported
78 Zone1 Zone 1 trip Not supported

84 General Start/Pick-up Any elements pick-up No set
85 Breaker Failure CBF trip or CBF retrip -- 2 1 192 332 -- 2
86 Trip measuring system L1 Not supported
89 Trip measuring system E Not supported
90 Trip I> Inverse time OC trip No set
91 Trip I>> Definite time OC trip No set
92 Trip IN> Inverse time earth fault OC trip No set
93 Trip IN>> Definite time earth fault OC trip No set
Autoreclose indications
128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose CB close command output Not supported
CB 'ON' by long-time
129 Not supported
Autoreclose
130 Autoreclose Blocked Autoreclose block Not supported
 251 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
IEC103 configurator Default setting

INF Description Contents Type
GI COT FUN Max. No.
ID
Measurands
144 Measurand I <meaurand I> No 0
145 Measurand I,V <meaurand I> No 0
146 Measurand I,V,P,Q <meaurand I> No 0
147 Measurand IN,VEN <meaurand I> No 0
Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, Ia, Ib, Ic, Va, Vb, Vc, P, Q, f measurand
148 -- 9 2, 7 192 9
P,Q,f <meaurand II>
Generic Function
240 Read Headings Not supported
Read attributes of all entries
241 Not supported
of a group
243 Read directory of entry Not supported
244 Real attribute of entry Not supported
245 End of GGI Not supported
249 Write entry with confirm Not supported
250 Write entry with execute Not supported
251 Write entry aborted Not supported
Details of MEA settings in IEC103 configurator

INF MEA Tbl Offset Data type Limit Coeff
Lower Upper
148 Ia 7 52 long 0 4096 3.41333
Ib 7 56 long 0 4096 3.41333
Ic 7 60 long 0 4096 3.41333
 252 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8

INF Description Contents Control Type
direction
COT FUN
ID
Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
System functions
Initiation of general
0 -- 7 9 255
interrogation
0 Time synchronization -- 6 8 255
General commands
16 Auto-recloser on/off Not supported
17 Teleprotection on/off ON/OFF 20 20 192
18 Protection on/off (*1) ON/OFF 20 20 192
19 LED reset Reset indication of latched LEDs. ON 20 20 192
23 Activate characteristic 1 Setting Group 1 ON 20 20 192
Generic functions
Read headings of all defined
240 Not supported
groups
Read values or attributes of all
241 Not supported
entries of one group
Read directory of a single
243 Not supported
entry
Read values or attributes of a
244 Not supported
single entry
General Interrogation of
245 Not supported
generic data
248 Write entry Not supported
249 Write entry with confirmation Not supported
250 Write entry with execution Not supported
(1) Note: While the relay receives the "Protection off" command, " IN SERVICE LED" is off.
Details of Command settings in IEC103 configurator

INF DCO
Sig off Sig on Rev Valid time
17 2685 2685 ✓ 0
18 2686 2686 0
✓
19 0 2688 200
23 0 2640 1000
24 0 2641 1000
25 0 2642 1000
26 0 2643 1000
✓: signal reverse
 253 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Description Contents GRL150 supported Comment

Basic application functions
Test mode Yes
Blocking of monitor direction Yes
Disturbance data No
Generic services No
Private data Yes
Miscellaneous
Max. MVAL = rated
Measurand
value times
Current L1 Ia Configurable
Current L2 Ib Configurable
Current L3 Ic Configurable
Voltage L1-E Va No
Voltage L2-E Vb No
Voltage L3-E Vc No
Active power P P No
Reactive power Q Q No
Frequency f f No
Voltage L1 - L2 Vab No
Details of Common settings in IEC103 configurator

- Remote operation valid time [ms]: 4000
- Local operation valid time [ms]: 4000
- Measurand period [s]: 2
- Function type of System functions: 192
- Signal No. of Test mode: 1039
- Signal No. for Real time and Fault number: 1038
 254 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.4.3)
Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
FUN: Function type (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.5.1)
DPI: Double-point Information (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.5)
DCO: Double Command (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.4)
 255 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved as follows:
(1) Naming for IEC103setting data
The file extension of IEC103 setting data is “.csv”. The version name is recommended to be
provided with a revision number in order to be changed in future as follows:
First draft: _01.csv
Second draft: _02.csv
Third draft: _03.csv
Revision number
The name “” is recommended to be able to discriminate the relay type such as GRZ100 or
GRL100, etc. The setting files remark field of IEC103 is able to enter up to 12 one-byte
characters. It is utilized for control of IEC103 setting data.
(2) Saving theIEC103 setting data
The IEC103 setting data is recommended to be saved in external media such as FD (floppy disk)
or CD-R, not to remain in the folder.
 256 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Troubleshooting
No. Phenomena Supposed causes Check / Confirmation

Object Procedure
1 Communication Address setting is incorrect. BCU Match address setting between BCU and relay.
trouble (IEC103
RY Avoid duplication of address with other relay.
communication is
not available.) Transmission baud rate setting is BCU Match transmission baud rate setting between
incorrect. BCU and relay.
RY
Start bit, stop bit and parity settings of BCU Go over the following settings by BCU. Relay
data that BCU transmits to relay is setting is fixed as following settings.
incorrect. - Start bit: 1bit
- Stop bit: 1bit
- Parity setting: even
The PRTCL1 setting is incorrect. (The RY Change the PRTCL1 setting. Relation between
model with PRTCL1 setting.) PRTCL1 setting and available transmission
protocol is referred to the following table.
RS485 port at the PRTCL1 PRTCL1

back of the relay =HDLC =IEC
COM1 (CH1) HDLC IEC
COM2 (CH2) IEC ―
RS485 or optical cable interconnection Cable - Check the connection port.(CH1/CH2)

is incorrect. - Check the interconnection of RS485 A/B/COM
- Check the send and received interconnection of
optical cable.
The setting of converter is incorrect. Converter In the event of using G1IF2, change the DIPSW
(RS485/optic conversion is executed setting in reference to INSTRUCTION MANUAL
with the transmission channel, etc.) (6F2S0794).
The relationship between logical “0/1” of BCU Check the following;
the signal and Sig.on/off is incorrect. (In Logical0 : Sig.on
the event of using optical cable)
Logical1:Sig.off
Terminal resistor is not offered. cable Impose terminal resistor (150[ohms]) to both ends
(Especially when RS485 cable is long.) of RS 485 cable.
Relay cannot receive the requirement BCU Check to secure the margin more than 15ms
frame from BCU. between receiving the reply frame from the relay
and transmitting the next requirement frame on
(The timing coordination of sending and
BCU.
receiving switch control is irregular in
half-duplex communication.)
The requirement frame from BCU and BCU Check to set the time-out of reply frame from the
the reply frame from relay contend. relay.
(The sending and receiving timing Time-out setting: more than 100ms (acceptable
coordination is irregular in half-duplex value of response time 50ms plus
communication.) margin)
 257 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
No. Phenomena Supposed causes Check / Confirmation

Object Procedure
2 HMI does not The relevant event sending condition is RY Change the event sending condition (signal
display IEC103 not valid. number) of IEC103 configurator if there is a setting
event on the SAS error. When the setting is correct, check the signal
side. condition by programmable LED, etc.
The relevant event Information Number RY Match the relevant event Information Number
(INF) and/or Function Type (FUN) may (INF) or Function Type (FUN) between the relay
SAS
be different between the relay and SAS. and SAS.
The relay is not initialised after writing RY Check the sum value of IEC103 setting data from
IEC103 configurator setting. the LCD screen. When differing from the sum
value on IEC103 configurator, initialise the relay.
It changes to the block mode. RY Change the IECBR settling to Normal.
3 Time can be BCU does not transmit the frame of time BCU Transmit the frame of time synchronisation.
synchronised with synchronisation.
IEC103
The settling of time synchronisation RY Change the settling of time synchronisation
communication.
source is set to other than IEC. source to IEC.
(Note) BCU: Bay control unit, RY: Relay
 258 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix N
Resistor Box (Option)
 259 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Resistor Box G1RE1-01
G1RE1 resistor box is available for reducing the transmission level of GRL150 if the
transmitting signal interferes with other communication signals in a multi-core pilot wire cable.
Specification
5kVac for 1 min. between all terminals and DIN rail.
Outline and Mounting

Outline:
58
48
52.8 26.3
89.6
62
45
U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 U6 W1 W2 W3
Mounting: DIN rail (35 mm)

Note: DIN rail is not supplied. User prepares DIN rail.
Connection terminal: M3 screw, Maximum wire size; 2.1mm (14AWG) for solid wire or
3.3mm (12AWG) for stranded wire
 260 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Connections
Internal connection:
RESISTOR BOX G1RE1
U4
R4: 36
U3
GRL150 R3: 36

TB3-A16 U2
R2: 36
R53 150Ω
U1
JP1
R1: 36
1 3 W1
2 4
R5: 150
TB3-A17 U6 W3
U5 W2
External connection:
The transmission level of GRL150 can be adjusted by selecting a terminal among U1 to U4.
TB3-A16 U1-4 W1 W1 U1-4 TB3-A16

U5 W2 W2 U5
-A17 U6 W3 W3 U6 -A17
GRL150 G1RE1 Pilot wire G1RE1 GRL150
Note: If U5 and W2 selected, the transmission level of GRL150 is not reduced.
Note: If using the G1RE1 resistor box, the terminal resistor inside the GRL150 is removed. The
terminal resistor is mounted on the sub-board (CIFP) on the SPMP board, and there are two
configurations (Type A and Type B) of CIFP board. Please remove the terminal resistor
according to the explanation below,
Type A: Remove the resistor R53 cutting the lead wires.
Type B: Insert the jumper to position 1-2 of connector JP1.
JP1
1 3
2 4
Change the jumper from 3-4

position (default position) to 1-2
position.
R53
CIFP board: Type A (drawn out from case) CIFP board: Type B (drawn out from case)
 261 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Appendix O
Ordering
 262 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Line Differential Protection GRL150 Information Required with Ordering
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
G R L 1 5 0 － 0 A － 0 － 0 －
Model
Telecommunication
Pilot wire interface 1
Both pilot wire and optical interface 4
Back-up Scheme
Back-up Phase OC Protection 0
Back-up Phase OC and EF Protection 1
Back-up Phase OC and Sensitive EF Protection 2
CT, Frequency, Vdc Rating

1A, 50Hz, 110/125Vdc 1
1A, 60Hz, 110/125Vdc 2
5A, 50Hz, 110/125Vdc 3
5A, 60Hz, 110/125Vdc 4
1A, 50Hz, 220/250Vdc 5
1A, 60Hz, 220/250Vdc 6
5A, 50Hz, 220/250Vdc 7
5A, 60Hz, 220/250Vdc 8
1A, 50Hz, 48/54/60Vdc A
1A, 60Hz, 48/54/60Vdc B
5A, 50Hz, 48/54/60Vdc C
5A, 60Hz, 48/54/60Vdc D
1A, 50Hz, 24/30Vdc E
1A, 60Hz, 24/30Vdc F
5A, 50Hz, 24/30Vdc G
5A, 60Hz, 24/30Vdc H
Rear communication port

RS485 1
Fibre Optic 2
Dual RS485 3
RS485 + Fibre Optic 9
Miscellaneous
None 0
LED label
Standard None
Option: User configurable LED label J
Accessory
(1) Isolation Trans. for Pilot Wire Comm. (option)
External 15kV Isolation Transformer for Pilot Wire Interface EB-110
(2) Resistor Box (option)

Resistor boox G1RE1-01
 263 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Version-up Records
Version Date Revised Section Contents
No.
0.0 Jul. 22, 2005 -- First issue
0.1 Sep. 06, 2005 1 Modified Table 1.1.
2.2.1, 2.2.3, 2.2.4 Modified Figures 2.2.1.1, 2.2.3.1, 2.2.4.1 and 2.2.4.2.
2.2.5, 2.2.6, 2.2.9 Modified the description.
2.3.2, 2.4.1, 2.5.1 Modified Figures 2.3.2.1 to 2.3.2.4, 2.4.1.1 to 2.4.1.4, and 2.5.1.1 to 2.5.1.4.
2.6.1, 2.9.1 Modified Figures 2.6.1.2 and 2.9.1.1.
2.10.1 Modified the description and Figure 2.10.1.3.
2.12 Modified Figures 2.12.1 and 2.12.2.
3.2.3, 3.3.3, 3.3.7 Modified Figures 3.2.3.1, 3.3.3.1, 3.3.7.1 and 3.3.7.2.
3.3.5 Modified the description.
Appendices Modified Appendix E, G, J and M.
0.2 Nov. 18, 2005 2.2.5 Modified the description.
2.2.9 Modified the description. (‘DIFI1 setting and Full-scale’ and ‘Setting of DIFI2’)
Appendices Modified Appendix I and J.
0.3 Feb. 2, 2006 4.1.2 Modified the description. (Interface port: MU  LC connector)
Appendices Modified Appendix J.
0.4 Mar. 31, 2006 3.3.5 Modified the description.
3.3.10 Modified the setting range table.
4.1.2 Modified Figure 4.1.2.1.
4.2.3.4, 4.2.6.5, Modified LCD sample screens.
4.2.6.7
Appendices Modified Appendix B, E and G.
0.5 Jun. 22, 2006 4.2.3.1, 4.2.4.1 Added the description and ‘Note’.
4.2.6.6 Modified the description and LCD sample screens in ‘Setting the metering’.
Appendices Modified Appendix N.
0.6 Jul. 19, 2006 2.2.9 Modified the description of the ‘CT Ratio matching’.
Corrected figure number. Figure 2.4.14.12.2.9.1, Figure 2.4.14.22.2.9.2
0.7 Sep. 11, 2006 2.2 Modified Figure 2.2.1. (Added Figure (b).)
2.2.5 Modified the table of user configurable commands.
2.2.9 Added ‘Setting of [SP.SYN].
3.1.1, 4.1.1 Modified the description. (LED)
4.2.1 Modified the description of ‘Displays in tripping’.
4.2.6.10 Modified the description.
4.2.7.1 Modified the description of [T.TEST] Caution.
6.5.1.1 Modified the description and Figure 6.5.1.2.
Appendices Modified Appendix B and G.
0.8 Apr. 24, 2008 Safety Precaution Added the description.
2.2.7 Added the description.
2.8 Added Figure 2.8.1.2.
4.4 Modified the description.
Appendices Added Appendix N and modified Appendix D, J, M and O.
0.9 Jun. 27, 2008 4.1.2 Modified the description.
4.2.4.4, 4.2.6.6 Modified the description.
Appendices Modified Appendix F.
1.0 Feb. 16, 2009 3.1.1 Modified Figure 3.1.1.2.
4.1.2 Modified Figure 4.1.2.1.
Appendices Modified Appendix E, F and J.
 264 
6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8
Version Date Revised Section Contents

No.
1.1 Jul. 31st, 2009 4.2.6.2, 4.2.7 Modified the description. (Added password trap in Test menu.)
Appendices Modified Appendix D and O.
1.2 Mar. 18th, 2010 Appendices Modified Appendix J (overload rating) and N.
1.3 Apr. 12nd, 2011 Appendices Modified Appendix N.
1.4 Oct. 26th, 2011 Appendix N Added the connection interface diagram of GRL150 for resistor box G1RE1.
1.5 Jan. 13rd, 2012 Appendix N Changed the photo. of CIFP board: Type B.
2.0 Jun. 26th, 2012 3.4.1 Modified the description.

 265 

GRL150 6F2S0828 2.0

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

GRL150 6F2S0828 2.0

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

6 F 2 S 0 8 2 8

LINE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY

© TOSHIBA Corporation 2005

Explanation of symbols used

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or

3.1 Hardware Description 52

5.5 External Connections 125

Appendix A Programmable Reset Characteristics and Implementation of Thermal

Table 1.1 – GRL150 Models

Table 2.1.2 Series Members and Functions

Model Number GRL150 -

2.2 Current Differential Protection

(b) Pilot wire

Figure 2.2.1 Current Differential Protection

2.2.1 Operation of Current Differential Protection

373 ICD 1680 DIF-A_IC_BLK 1

Figure 2.2.1.1 Scheme Logic of Segregated-phase Current Differential Protection

2.2.2 Characteristic of Current Differential Element DIF

Figure 2.2.2.1 DIF Element (Ir-Id Plane)

Characteristic A of the DIF element is expressed by the following equation:

Characteristic B is expressed by the following equation:

where DIFI2 is a setting and its physical meaning is described later.

Figure 2.2.2.2 DIF Element (Iin-Iout Plane)

Characteristic A is expressed by the following equation:

2.2.3 Fail-safe Function (Overcurrent Guard Scheme)

Figure 2.2.3.1 Fail-safe Logic

Current change detection element OCD

Figure 2.2.3.2 Current Change Detection

2.2.4 Open Terminal (Out-of-Service) Detection

1092 COM5-R1 1651 I.LINK-R1 1 432

1104 SUB.COM1-R1 1650 L.TEST-R1 By PLC

Figure 2.2.4.1 Out-of-Service Detection Logic

532 BI5-COM-T 1547 EXT_CB_CLOSE

Figure 2.2.4.2 Inter-Link detection

2.2.5 Transmission Data

User programmable commands

Default signal Command Command Default signal

Default signal Command Command Default signal

2.2.6 Synchronized Sampling

Figure 2.2.6.1 Timing Synchronization

2.2.7 Telecommunication Circuit

2.2.8 Telecommunication Channel Monitoring

Element Range Step Default Remarks

[RL-MODE] Auto / Manual Auto Signal receiving level adjusting mode

CT ratio : 2000/1A CT ratio : 4000/1A

DIFI1=800A / CT ratio(2000/1A) DIFI1=800A / CT ratio(4000/1A)

Figure 2.2.9.1 Example of CT Ratio Matching

CT ratio : 2000/1A CT ratio : 2000/5A

DIFI1=800A / CT ratio(2000/1A) DIFI1=800A / CT ratio(2000/5A)

Figure 2.2.9.2 Example of CT Ratio Matching incase of Different CT secondary Rating

DIFI1 setting and Full-scale

2.3 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection

2.3.1 Inverse Time (IDMT) Operation

Table 2.3.1.1 Specification of IDMT Curves

Table 2.3.1.2 Setting Range of IDMT Curves

Curve defining constants Range Step Remarks

IEC/UK Inverse Curves IEEE/US Inverse Curves

Figure 2.3.1.1 IDMT Characteristics

Programmable Reset Characteristics

Definite time reset

Dependent time reset

Figure 2.3.1.2 illustrates the dependent time reset characteristics.